Google
 

Trailing-Edge - PDP-10 Archives - tops10v704_auxft - 10,7/aux/sig.mem
There are 2 other files named sig.mem in the archive. Click here to see a list.


|                             FIELD TEST DRAFT













                    TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide



                                AA-P512C-TB





                    The  TOPS-10   Software   Installation   Guide
                    provides   the   site   administrator,  system
                    manager,  system   programmer,   or   software
                    specialist  with  the  information required to
                    install the TOPS-10  software  on  KL  and  KS
                    processors.



|                   OPERATING SYSTEM:         TOPS-10 Version 7.04
|  
|                   SOFTWARE:                   GALAXY Version 5.1



          digital equipment corporation . marlboro, massachusetts


                                            First Printing, February 1984
|  
|                                                     Revised, April 1986
|                                                     Revised, March 1988
|  
|  
|  
   The information in this document is subject to change  without  notice
   and  should  not  be  construed  as  a commitment by Digital Equipment
   Corporation.  Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no  responsibility
   for any errors that may appear in this document.

   The software described in this document is furnished under  a  license
   and  may  only  be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
   license.

   No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software or
   equipment that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
|  
|  
|  
|     Copyright (C) 1984, 1986, 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation
|                           All Rights Reserved.
|  
|  
|  
   The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last  page  of  this
   document  requests  the  user's  critical  evaluation  to assist us in
   preparing future documentation.

   The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

             DEC                 DECnet              IAS
             DECUS               DECsystem-10        MASSBUS
             Digital logo        DECsystem-20        PDT
             PDP                 DECwriter           RSTS
             UNIBUS              DIBOL               RSX
             VAX                 EduSystem           VMS
                                                     VT


                                      CONTENTS



   PREFACE


   PART 1: GETTING STARTED


   CHAPTER 1       INTRODUCTION

           1.1     READING PATH FOR NEW INSTALLATIONS . . . . . . . . 1-1
           1.2     READING PATH FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS  . . . . . 1-3
           1.3     SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION  . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4


   CHAPTER 2       PREPARATION

           2.1     TOPS-10 SYSTEM INSTALLATION MATERIALS  . . . . . . 2-2
           2.2     KL FRONT END INSTALLATION MATERIALS  . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.3     REQUIRED HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.3.1     KL Hardware  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.3.2     KS Hardware  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
           2.4     POWERING UP THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
           2.4.1     Powering up the KL10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
           2.4.2     Powering up the KS10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
           2.5     PREPARING INFORMATION  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
           2.5.1     Worksheet 1  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
           2.5.2     Worksheet 2  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
           2.5.3     Worksheet 3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6


   PART 2: PREPARING THE SYSTEM


   CHAPTER 3       BOOTING THE SYSTEM

           3.1     BOOTING THE KL SYSTEM  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
           3.1.1     Intializing the KL Front End . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
           3.1.2     Booting the KL Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
           3.2     BOOTING THE KS SYSTEM  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4


   CHAPTER 4       STARTING THE BOOTSTRAP MONITOR

           4.1     THE ONCE DIALOGUE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
           4.2     BRINGING UP A NEW SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3






                                    iii


   CHAPTER 5       BUILDING THE MONITOR FILE SYSTEM

           5.1     ALLOCATING DISK SPACE FOR THE KL FRONT END . . . . 5-2
           5.2     RESTORING BACKUP FROM TAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
           5.3     RESTORING FILES FROM TAPE TO DISK  . . . . . . . . 5-3
           5.3.1     Restoring the Bootstrap Monitor  . . . . . . . . 5-3
           5.3.2     Restoring the Monitor Sources and Associated 
                     Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
           5.4     CREATING THE TOPS-10 SYSTEM DIRECTORIES  . . . . . 5-5
           5.5     COPYING THE FILES INTO DIRECTORIES . . . . . . . . 5-6


   CHAPTER 6       BUILDING THE SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSOR'S FILE SYSTEM

           6.1     BUILDING THE KL FRONT END FILE SYSTEM  . . . . . . 6-1
           6.1.1     Loading the Front End  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
           6.1.2     Booting the KL Front End from Disk . . . . . . . 6-5
           6.2     CREATING THE KS MICROPROCESSOR FILE SYSTEM . . . . 6-6
           6.2.1     Creating a Front end File System Directory Area  6-6
           6.2.2     Writing the Bootstrap Program to Disk  . . . . . 6-6


   PART 3: UPGRADING AN EXISTING SYSTEM


   CHAPTER 7       RESTORING THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPES

           7.1     RESTORING KS MICROPROCESSOR FILES  . . . . . . . . 7-2
           7.2     RESTORING THE MONITOR SOURCES AND ASSOCIATED 
                   SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
           7.3     RESTORING TAPES USING COMMAND FILES  . . . . . . . 7-3
           7.4     USING SYSTEM FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4


   CHAPTER 8       RESTORING THE SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSOR'S FILE SYSTEM

           8.1     THE DISTRIBUTED KL FRONT END SOFTWARE  . . . . . . 8-1
           8.2     USING RSXINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
           8.2.1     The RSXINS Dialogue  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
           8.2.2     Installing the Front End File System . . . . . . 8-6
           8.2.3     Automatic Front End Reload . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
           8.3     WRITING THE KS BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM TO DISK . . . . . 8-9


   PART 4: BUILDING THE MONITOR AND TAILORING THE 
           SYSTEM


   CHAPTER 9       BUILDING YOUR MONITOR

           9.1     MONGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
           9.1.1     Running MONGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3


                                     iv


           9.1.2     The MONGEN Dialogue Questions  . . . . . . . . . 9-5
           9.1.2.1     Running SYSGEN   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
           9.1.2.2     Running FGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9-14
           9.2     ASSEMBLING THE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9-16
           9.3     LINKING AND SAVING THE MONITOR . . . . . . . . .  9-17
           9.3.1     Copying the New Monitor to SYS:  . . . . . . .  9-17
           9.4     BRINGING UP THE NEW MONITOR  . . . . . . . . . .  9-18
           9.5     CREATING THE SYSTEM BOOTABLE TAPE  . . . . . . .  9-19
           9.5.1     Creating the KL System Bootable Tape . . . . .  9-19
           9.5.2     Creating the KS System Bootable Tape . . . . .  9-20
           9.6     AUTOMATING THE BUILD PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . .  9-20
           9.6.1     Customizing the Build Files  . . . . . . . . .  9-22
           9.6.2     The Build Procedure  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9-25
           9.7     CUSTOMIZING BOOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9-26
           9.7.1     Customizing the KL BOOT  . . . . . . . . . . .  9-26
           9.7.2     Customizing the KS BOOT  . . . . . . . . . . .  9-28


   CHAPTER 10      STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM

           10.1    STARTING THE GALAXY SPOOLERS . . . . . . . . . .  10-2
           10.2    TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM  . . . . . . . . . .  10-3
           10.2.1    Running GALGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  10-3
           10.2.2    Assembling the Tailored GALAXY System  . . . . 10-11
           10.3    SHUTTING DOWN THE GALAXY SYSTEM  . . . . . . . . 10-12
           10.4    STARTING THE GALAXY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14


   CHAPTER 11      MAINTAINING THE SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION FILE

           11.1    CONVERTING OLD ACCOUNTING FILES  . . . . . . . .  11-1
           11.2    ENTERING AND EXITING REACT . . . . . . . . . . .  11-1
           11.3    GETTING HELP WHILE USING REACT . . . . . . . . .  11-2
           11.4    DISPLAYING USER ACCOUNT INFORMATION  . . . . . .  11-3
           11.5    CREATING NEW ACCOUNTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  11-4
           11.5.1    Creating Multiple Accounts with the Same 
                     Project Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  11-4
           11.5.2    Creating a Single New User Account . . . . . .  11-5
           11.6    CHANGING ACCOUNTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  11-7
           11.7    DELETING ACCOUNTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  11-8
           11.8    VERIFYING CHANGES TO ACCOUNTING FILES  . . . . .  11-8
           11.9    USING ACCOUNT VALIDATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
           11.9.1    CREATING THE PROJCT.ACT FILE . . . . . . . . . 11-10
           11.9.2    CREATING THE PROJCT.EXE FILE . . . . . . . . . 11-11
           11.10   MAINTAINING LOGIN FAILURE RECORDS  . . . . . . . 11-12
           11.11   TOP-LEVEL REACT COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
           11.12   USER-MODE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15


   CHAPTER 12      CREATING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION FILES

           12.1    INITIA AT SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . .  12-1


                                     v


           12.1.1    The SYSJOB.INI File  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  12-2
           12.1.1.1    Format of SYSJOB.INI . . . . . . . . . . . .  12-3
           12.1.2    The TTY.INI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  12-5
           12.1.2.1    Format of TTY.INI  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  12-5
           12.1.2.2    Specifying Terminal Lines  . . . . . . . . .  12-6
           12.1.2.3    Specifying Terminal Options  . . . . . . . .  12-7
           12.1.2.4    Associated (Error) Messages  . . . . . . . . 12-10
           12.1.3    The INITIA Monitor Command . . . . . . . . . . 12-10


   PART 5: SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION


   APPENDIX A      ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS

           A.1     ONCE AT SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
           A.2     RUNNING ONCE IN USER MODE  . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
           A.3     STARTUP OPTIONS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
           A.3.1     CHANGing System Parameters . . . . . . . . . .  A-11
           A.3.2     DEFINing Structures and System Lists . . . . .  A-14
           A.3.3     DESTROYing All Structures  . . . . . . . . . .  A-20
           A.3.4     DISSOLving a Single Structure  . . . . . . . .  A-23
           A.3.5     EXITing to Monitor Level . . . . . . . . . . .  A-24
           A.3.6     GO Option  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-24
           A.3.7     NOINITIA Option  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  A-25
           A.3.8     REFRESHing Selected Structures . . . . . . . .  A-25
           A.3.9     SHOWing System Parameters  . . . . . . . . . .  A-26


   APPENDIX B      MODIFYING THE MONITOR

           B.1     REBUILDING THE MONITOR LIBRARY FILE  . . . . . . . B-1
           B.2     CHANGING COMMON SYMBOLS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
           B.2.1     Symbols Defined in COMMON  . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
           B.2.1.1     Decimal Symbols,Values . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
           B.2.1.2     Octal Symbols,Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
           B.2.1.3     SIXBIT Symbols,Values  . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
           B.2.2     Symbols Defined in COMDEV  . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
           B.2.2.1     Decimal Symbols,Values . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
           B.2.2.2     Octal Symbols,Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
           B.2.3     Symbols Defined in COMMOD  . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
           B.2.3.1     Decimal Symbols,Values . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
           B.2.3.2     Octal Symbols,Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
           B.2.3.3     SIXBIT Symbols,Values  . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8


   APPENDIX C      SETTING SCHEDULER PARAMETERS

           C.1     REQUIRED PRIVILEGES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
           C.2     CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
           C.3     SCDSET COMMANDS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
           C.3.1     EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2


                                     vi


           C.3.2     EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
           C.3.3     HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
           C.3.4     READ/SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
           C.3.5     UPDATE JOBS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
           C.4     THE SCDMAP.SYS FILE  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6


   APPENDIX D      CREATING BOOTABLE FRONT END MEDIA

           D.1     BUILDING THE PRIMARY BOOTABLE VOLUMES  . . . . . . D-1
           D.2     BUILDING THE THIRD VOLUME  . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4


   APPENDIX E      SOFTWARE INSTALLATION GUIDE GLOSSARY


   TABLES

           9-1     Monitor Build Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9-21
           11-1    FAILUR.LOG File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
           11-2    Top-level REACT Commands   . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
           11-3    REACT Field Change Commands  . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
           12-1    Special Processing Commands  . . . . . . . . . .  12-8
           12-2    Options to Run Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . .  12-9
           A-1     Disk Parameters Defaulted By DESTROY Option  . .  A-21
           A-2     Device Channels and Controllers  . . . . . . . .  A-22
           C-1     SCDMAP.SYS Format  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6














                                  PREFACE



   This manual describes how to install, upgrade,  customize,  and  start
   the  TOPS-10 operating system.  It includes procedures for loading the
   default monitor, copying the programs from the distribution  tapes  to
   disk,  building  the  monitor,  starting  the  operating  system,  and
   creating  the  bootstrap  tape.   The   procedures   for   installing,
   customizing,  and  starting  the  GALAXY batch and spooling system are
   also included, as well as descriptions of  the  various  system  files
   needed  for  timesharing  on  the  TOPS-10 system.  The procedures are
   described and explained in a step-by-step method.

   The TOPS-10 Software Installation  Guide  may  also  be  used  in  the
   following situations to:

         o  Start the system after a shutdown or failure.

         o  Change the monitor configuration.

         o  Install a new version of the monitor or GALAXY subsystem.

         o  Change disk parameters.

   This manual is intended for experienced TOPS-10  software  maintainers
   who  are  familiar  with TOPS-10 conventions for commands and symbols.
   You should be able to operate the hardware components  of  the  system
   being  installed.   For  example,  instructions  for mounting software
   media (tapes and disks) are not  documented  in  this  manual  because
   those  procedures are documented in the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide.  The
   following  manuals  are  also  valuable  sources  of  information  for
   additional reference:

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual

       This manual provides  information  about  writing  and  submitting
       batch control files to the GALAXY batch processor.

   TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual


                                    vii


       This  manual  provides  information  about  monitor  commands  and
       conventions.

   TOPS-10 Operator's Command Language Reference Manual

       This  manual  provides  information  about  the  OPR  program  and
       operator-privileged commands.

   TOPS-10 MACRO Reference Manual

       This manual provides information required for  making  changes  to
       program source code.

   TOPS-10 LINK Reference Manual

       This manual provides information about TOPS-10's  linking  loader,
       its  switches, commands, and functions.  LINK is used to build the
       monitor after the software configuration has been specified.

   TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual

       This manual provides in-depth information about monitor calls  and
       monitor  symbols  that  you  may  wish  to  modify  in the monitor
       sources.

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 RSX-20F System Reference Manual

       This manual provides information about the KL system's  front  end
       processor.   Of particular importance are references to the KLINIT
       dialogue and the PARSER commands.

   TOPS-10/20 USAGE File Specification

       This manual provides information about the formats  of  the  files
       created by the USAGE accounting system.

   TOPS-10 ANF-10 Software Installation Guide

       This manual provides information for building ANF-10 remote nodes.
|  
|  The procedures for installing a TOPS-10 system  vary  greatly  between
|  the  first-time, new installation of a system, and the installation of
|  a new version of the  monitor  on  a  system  that  has  been  running
|  TOPS-10.   This manual is organized into separate parts to address the
|  specific needs of each case.
|  
|  Part 1, "Getting Started", provides two chapters that explain  how  to
|  use  the  manual.  Chapter 1 contains introductory material which will
|  help you find the procedures that apply to your installation.  Chapter
|  2  contains  worksheets  that  are  useful  when  building the TOPS-10
|  monitor.  DIGITAL Field Service personnel can help you  fill  out  the
|  hardware  worksheet (Worksheet 1).  As system manager you must provide


                                    viii


|  the information for the software worksheet (Worksheet 2) and  for  the
|  disk  parameters  worksheet  (Worksheet  3).  Questions about software
|  considerations can be answered by a DIGITAL Software Specialist.
|  
|  Part 2,  "Preparing  the  System",  consists  of  four  chapters  that
|  describe  the  procedures  TOPS-10  installers  must  complete  before
|  building the monitor on a new installation.
|  
|  Part 3, "Upgrading the System", contains two  chapters  that  describe
|  the  procedures  TOPS-10 installers must complete before upgrading the
|  monitor on an existing system.
|  
|  Part 4, "Building the Monitor and Tailoring the System", provides four
|  chapters  that describe how to build your monitor and tailor it to the
|  particular needs of your site.  This part applies to both upgrades and
|  new installations.
|  
|  Part 5,  "Supplementary  Information",  contains  4  appendixes.   The
|  appendixes  contain  alternatives  to  the  installation procedure and
|  information for modifying the monitor software.
|  
|  A glossary is  also  included  after  the  appendixes.   The  glossary
|  defines the specialized terms used in this manual.

   Prepare for the task of installing the monitor  carefully.   Read  the
   parts  of  this  manual that you are not familiar with, and be sure to
   set aside plenty of time to complete the installation.   If  you  have
   any  problems with the information in this manual, please fill out the
   Reader's Comment Card provided at the back of the book, and mail it to
   Digital  Equipment Corporation.  This is an important form of feedback
   for improving the quality of the documentation.


   CONVENTIONS

   The following conventions are used in this manual,  according  to  the
   definitions  given  here.   Terms  and  file  names are defined in the
   Glossary in Appendix E.

   Convention          Meaning

   ?                   is  used  as  a   wildcard   character   in   file
                       specifications.  Any character in the filespec may
                       be replaced by a ?, thereby causing the  reference
                       to  include  any  files  with the same characters;
                       except that any  character  will  be  accepted  in
                       place of the ?, or no character may replace the ?.
                       For example, the filespec:

                            DSKB:MAN???.RPT[27,5434]

                       is satisfied by all of the following:


                                     ix


                            DSKB:MANUAL.RPT[27,5434]
                            DSKB:MAN.RPT[27,5434]
                            DSKB:MANTM.RPT[27,5434]

   *                   is also used  as  a  wildcard  character  in  file
                       specifications, but it replaces an entire field of
                       the specification; that is, the  file  name,  file
                       extension,  project  number, programmer number, or
                       SFD name.  Wildcard characters are described  more
                       thoroughly  in  Chapter 1 of the TOPS-10 Operating
                       System Commands Manual.

   <CTRL/x>            represents  a  control-character.   To   enter   a
                       control-character,  hold  down  the  CTRL  key and
                       press the character represented by x.

   <ESC>               represents places where you press the ESCape key.

   <RET>               represents places where you press the RETURN key.

   underlined text     represents user input.

   hh:mm:ss            represents time on a 24-hour  clock,  where  hh  =
                       hours, mm = minutes, ss = seconds.

   mmm-dd-yy           represent  a  date,  where mmm = month, dd =
   or dd-mmm-yy        day, yy = year.

   V#(##)              represent software version numbers.
   VA##-##
   VE##-##























                                     x
























































                                     xi















                          PART 1: GETTING STARTED




             This part contains two introductory chapters which
             explain   how  to  use  this  manual.   Chapter  1
             contains introductory material which will help you
             find the procedures that apply to the installation
             you  are  responsible  for.   Chapter  2  contains
             worksheets  that  are  useful  when  building  the
             TOPS-10 monitor.











                                 CHAPTER 1

                                INTRODUCTION



   Before you install the system, read the cover letter distributed  with
|  the software package and the BEWARE file (MONITR.BWR) that is included
|  on the Monitor/ANF-10  tape.   They  contain  information  about  last
   minute  changes  to installation procedures that could not be included
   in this manual.

   This manual uses the following conventions  to  denote  the  different
   procedures for KL and KS systems:

         o  Sections appropriate to only one type  of  processor  include
            the processor type in the title.

         o  Within sections, specific references are made in the text  to
            each type of processor.



   1.1  READING PATH FOR NEW INSTALLATIONS

   The new system is assumed to have no  data  on  the  formatted  disks.
   Therefore,  you  must  initialize the system and the system files.  To
   install the new system, first read and follow all of the  instructions
   in  Part  1,  Chapters  1  and  2.   Then,  read and follow all of the
   instructions in each chapter of Part 2 that are  appropriate  for  the
   type  of processor (KL or KS) that you are installing.  Next, go on to
   Part 4 and follow the procedures necessary to build your  monitor  and
   tailor it to the needs of your particular site.  Below is a summary of
   the chapters in Parts 1, 2, and 4  that  are  appropriate  for  a  new
   installation.


   PART 1:  GETTING STARTED

   Chapter 1:  INTRODUCTION

        This chapter will help you find the procedures that apply to  the
        installation you are currently responsible for.


                                    1-1
                                INTRODUCTION


   Chapter 2:  PREPARATION

        Chapter 2 describes how to check the hardware to be sure that  it
        was  installed  properly  and is ready for software installation.
        It contains worksheets to help you prepare the  information  that
        you will need during installation.


   PART 2:  PREPARING THE SYSTEM

   Chapter 3:  BOOTING THE SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to load  the  bootstrap  monitor  from
        tape and boot the system.  For KL systems, this chapter describes
        booting the front end  processor  as  well.   With  this  initial
        system, you can build the TOPS-10 monitor.

   Chapter 4:  STARTING THE MONITOR

        This chapter describes the ONCE dialogue, and  describes  how  to
        start the bootstrap monitor on a new installation.

   Chapter 5:  BUILDING THE MONITOR FILE SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to copy the  monitor  sources,  CUSPs,
        GALAXY system, and unbundled software from the distribution tapes
        into disk areas that you  prepare  for  this  purpose.   It  also
        describes how to create the system's administrative control files
        and system program initialization files.

   Chapter 6:  BUILDING THE SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSOR'S FILE SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to copy the front end  processor  (for
        KL  systems)  or  the  microprocessor  (for  KS systems) from the
        distribution media to disk, and how to boot the  front  end  from
        disk with the new software.


   PART 4:  BUILDING YOUR MONITOR AND TAILORING THE SYSTEM

   Chapter 9:  BUILDING YOUR MONITOR

        This chapter describes how to tailor the  TOPS-10  monitor  using
        MONGEN.   MONGEN  is  used  to  create  new monitor configuration
        files.  You can also assemble and  load  the  new  software,  and
        reload the system to start the new version of the monitor.

   Chapter 10:  STARTING AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to start up the  GALAXY  spoolers  and
        servers,  how  to  tailor the GALAXY batch and spooling system to
        the particular needs of the installation, and how to assemble and


                                    1-2
                                INTRODUCTION


        load the new GALAXY system.

   Chapter 11:  MAINTAINING THE SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION FILES

        This chapter describes how to use the REACT program to create the
        system  accounting  files.   The  system accounting files specify
        PPNs and disk usage authorization for users.

   Chapter 12:  CREATING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION FILES

        This chapter describes the INITIA program, and how to use  INITIA
        to  start  up  TOPS-10  system  components automatically when the
        system is reloaded.



   1.2  READING PATH FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS

   If you are installing a new version of the monitor on  a  system  that
   has  been  running  TOPS-10,  you  will probably use disks with system
   information on  them.   You  need  not  create  system  accounting  or
   initialization  files  and  you  will  not  need to boot the bootstrap
   monitor from tape.  However, it is necessary  to  restore  files  from
   tape exactly as documented in these procedures.

   Before building a new  monitor  for  the  existing  installation,  you
   should  save  the  existing monitor sources, CUSPs, GALAXY components,
   and (for KL systems) front end file system on a backup disk  or  tape.
   This  will  allow  you  to  fall  back  to your old monitor if the new
   monitor is difficult to install or run.

   To install  the  new  monitor,  first  read  and  follow  all  of  the
   instructions  in  Part 1, Chapters 1 and 2.  Then, read and follow all
   of the instructions in each chapter of Part 3 that are appropriate for
   the type of processor (KL or KS) that you have.  Next, go on to Part 4
   and follow the procedures necessary to build your monitor  and  tailor
   it  to  the  needs of your particular site.  Below is a summary of the
   chapters in Parts 1, 3, and  4  that  are  appropriate  for  a  system
   upgrade.


   PART 1:  GETTING STARTED

   Chapter 1:  INTRODUCTION

        This chapter will help you find the procedures that apply to  the
        installation you are currently responsible for.

   Chapter 2:  PREPARATION

        Preparation for building the monitor is very important.   Chapter
        2  contains  worksheets  to help you prepare the information that


                                    1-3
                                INTRODUCTION


        you will need during installation.  Experienced  installers  will
        find the checklists and worksheets in this chapter useful.


   PART 3:  UPGRADING THE SYSTEM

   Chapter 7:  BUILDING THE MONITOR FILE SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to restore  the  monitor,  CUSPs,  and
        unbundled  software  from the distribution tapes, and how to copy
        them into the appropriate disk areas.

   Chapter 8:  RESTORING THE SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSOR'S FILE SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to build the front end file system and
        reload  the  front  end  (KL  systems only) and how to create the
        microprocessor file system (KS systems only).


   PART 4:  BUILDING THE MONITOR AND TAILORING THE SYSTEM

   Chapter 9:  BUILDING YOUR MONITOR

        This chapter describes how to tailor the  TOPS-10  monitor  using
        MONGEN.   MONGEN  is  used  to  create  new monitor configuration
        files.  You can also assemble and  load  the  new  software,  and
        reload the system to start the new version of the monitor.

   Chapter 10:  STARTING AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM

        This chapter describes how to start up the  GALAXY  spoolers  and
        servers,  how  to  tailor the GALAXY batch and spooling system to
        the particular needs of the installation, and how to assemble and
        load the new GALAXY system.

   Chapter 11:  MAINTAINING THE SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION FILES

        This chapter describes how to use the REACT program to create the
        system  accounting  files.   The  system accounting files specify
        PPNs and disk usage authorization for users.

   Chapter 12:  CREATING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION FILES

        This chapter describes the INITIA program, and how to use  INITIA
        to  start  up  TOPS-10  system  components automatically when the
        system is reloaded.



   1.3  SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION

   Supplementary information is provided in Part  5.   This  consists  of


                                    1-4
                                INTRODUCTION


   four   appendixes.    The   appendixes  contain  alternatives  to  the
   installation procedure  and  information  for  modifying  the  monitor
   software.  The appendixes are summarized below:

   Appendix A:  ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS

        This appendix describes the options  to  the  ONCE  program  that
        define disk characteristics and start up the monitor.

   Appendix B:  MODIFYING THE MONITOR

        This appendix describes how to  modify  the  monitor,  build  the
        monitor  library file by hand, and generate a monitor that is not
        completely supported by Digital Equipment Corporation.   It  also
        contains  brief  descriptions  of  the  relevant  symbols, source
        modules, and symbol files.

   Appendix C:  SETTING SCHEDULER PARAMETERS

        This appendix explains how to  use  the  SCDSET  program  to  set
        system  usage  quotas,  adjust  scheduler  parameters, update the
        class of all logged in jobs, and manipulate a SCDMAP.SYS file.

   Appendix D:  MAKING THE DISTRIBUTION MEDIA BOOTABLE

        This appendix describes the procedure for making  the  front  end
        media bootable for RSX-20F.



























                                    1-5
























































                                    2-1











                                 CHAPTER 2

                                PREPARATION



   This chapter explains the steps and precautions  to  take  before  you
   install the monitor on a new system or upgrade your existing monitor.

   If  you  are  installing  a  new  system,  a  DIGITAL  Field   Service
   Representative will install the hardware components of your system and
   will run diagnostics to ensure that the hardware functions properly.

   The materials you need to install a new system or upgrade an  existing
   system are:

         o  A supported hardware configuration.  See Section 2.3.

            To ensure that you have the  hardware  information  that  you
            need  to  install  the  system,  prepare  Worksheet 1 in this
            chapter.  If you are installing a new  system,  the  hardware
            characteristics should be listed for you by the Field Service
            Representative.

         o  A disk unit with plenty of free space.

            At least 100,000  disk  blocks  are  required  for  a  system
            upgrade.   A  newly  formatted  disk  is  required  for a new
            installation.

         o  Software distribution media:  magnetic tapes,  DECtapes,  and
            floppy diskettes.

            Each type of processor requires software that is  distributed
            on  a  different  set  of media.  The distribution package is
            described in the following sections.

         o  A list of software components and options.

            Use Worksheet 2 in this chapter to record this information.

         o  A list of disk parameters and search lists.



                                    2-1
                                PREPARATION


            Use Worksheet 3 in this chapter to record this information.

         o  System accounting files to record user  accounts  and  access
            privileges.

            You can create  these  with  the  REACT  program.   REACT  is
            described in Chapter 11.

         o  A SYSJOB.INI file or OPR.ATO file to use for automatic system
            startup.

|           Chapter 12 explains how to  create  a  SYSJOB.INI  file.   An
|           OPR.ATO  file  can be used to automatically load and reload a
|           communications front end  by  inclusion  of  the  appropriate
|           commands.   For  information  on  the  OPR.ATO  file, see the
|           TOPS-10 Operator's Guide.



   2.1  TOPS-10 SYSTEM INSTALLATION MATERIALS

   The following magnetic tapes are provided in the software distribution
   package:
|  
|        o  The TOPS-10 Monitor/ANF-10 Tape
|  
            This magnetic tape contains the bundled  monitor  and  ANF-10
            software   for   TOPS-10.    The  tape  is  written  at  1600
            bits-per-inch  density  (BPI)  by  the  BACKUP  program.   It
            contains the following:

             -  Monitor source files

             -  TOPS-10 ANF-10 network files
|  
|            -  MONITR.BWR file, which describes changes to the monitor.

         o  The TOPS-10 CUSP Tapes

            "CUSP" stands for "Commonly Used System Program".  A CUSP  is
            a  system  program  that provides important functions for the
            user.  These tapes contain the latest versions of all of  the
            TOPS-10  monitor CUSPs and the files for the GALAXY batch and
            spooling system.  The tapes are written at 1600  BPI  by  the
            BACKUP   program.   The  CUSP  tape  contains  a  file  named
            CUSP.BWR, which describes changes to the programs on the CUSP
            tape.

         o  The Customer-Supported Tape

            This tape contains files that are supported by  the  customer
            base, not by DIGITAL.  This tape is also written at 1600 BPI.


                                    2-2
                                PREPARATION


            It contains the following files:

             -  customer-supported CUSP files

             -  customer-supported monitor modules

         o  The Tools Tape

            This tape  contains  files  that  can  be  used  for  various
            purposes,  as  supplied.  The tools are provided "as is", and
            may not be supported.
|  
|        o  The Bootable Tape

            This tape contains the TOPS-10 bootstrap monitor and  related
|           programs.   The  bootable  tape  is  provided to allow you to
|           start a standard operating system used to build a  customized
            monitor.   The  tape  is  written  at  1600 BPI by the BACKUP
            program.

         o  Unbundled Software Tapes

            For each unbundled software product, magnetic tape(s) contain
            the  software  necessary for running the software.  Note that
            unbundled options may require installation instructions  that
            are  not included in this manual because the product contains
            its own installation manual.



   2.2  KL FRONT END INSTALLATION MATERIALS

   The KL processor is also supplied with software for the RSX-20F  front
   end.   The  front  end  software  is distributed on different types of
|  media, depending upon the system.  A KL10-D (DECsystem-1090) front end
|  requires  three  DECtapes,  labeled  DT-A,  DT-B,  and DT-C.  A KL10-E
|  (DECsystem-1091) front end requires three  floppy  diskettes,  labeled
|  FLP-A, FLP-B, and FLP-C.



   2.3  REQUIRED HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

   The bootstrap monitor for TOPS-10 requires a minimal set of peripheral
   hardware.  The required configurations are different for the KL and KS
   systems, and are specified below.



   2.3.1  KL Hardware

   For a KL processor,  the  minimally  required  configuration  for  the


                                    2-3
                                PREPARATION


   boostrap monitor is:

         o  One RH20 for disk, dual-ported between the front end  and  KL
            processor

         o  One RH20 for tape

         o  CTY (console terminal)




   2.3.2  KS Hardware

|  For a KS 2020 processor, the minimally required configuration for  the
|  bootstrap monitor is:

         o  One RH11 (UBA#1) for disk

         o  One RH11 (UBA#3) for tape

         o  CTY (console terminal)

   If you are  installing  a  new  system  and  have  all  the  materials
   available  to  begin  installation,  you are now ready to power up the
   system; continue reading this chapter.  If you are  installing  a  new
   version of the monitor on an existing system, go to Section 2.5.



   2.4  POWERING UP THE SYSTEM

|  Before powering up the system, perform the following steps:
|  
|        o  For KL systems only, set the port controller select switch on
|           the  disk  drive that is dual-ported between the KL10 and the
|           front end to the A/B position.
|  
|        o  Power up the disk drives.
|  
|        o  Power up the magnetic tape drives.
|  
|        o  Power up the line printers.
|  
|        o  Turn on the CTY(s).  Make sure each is loaded with paper  and
|           is  on-line.   Check the terminal setting for line speed.  An
|           LA36 terminal must be set to 300 baud.  For an LA120, ask the
|           Field Service Representative what the baud rate should be.
|  
   If a line printer, disk drive, or magtape drive  is  not  powered  up,
   refer to the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for powering-up procedures.



                                    2-4
                                PREPARATION


   2.4.1  Powering up the KL10

   To power up the KL10, press the black  switch  on  the  upper  control
   panel  to  the  position labeled POWER ON.  When the system is powered
   up, the light labeled POWER is lit.  If you have never powered up  the
   system,   refer   to   the   TOPS-10  Operator's  Guide  for  detailed
   instructions.



   2.4.2  Powering up the KS10

   To power up the KS10, press the button labeled POWER.  When the system
   is  powered  up, the light labeled POWER is lit.  This usually takes a
   few seconds.  15 seconds after the power light comes  on,  the  system
   will  try to load the microcode from the disk on drive 0.  The message
   BT AUTO will be printed on the CTY to indicate that this operation  is
   in  progress.   Because  the  microcode  is  not on the disk, repeated
   attempts to load the microcode will be unsuccessful and the  CTY  will
   continue  to  print BT AUTO every 15 seconds.  Enter CTRL/C on the CTY
   to stop the process of searching for the microcode on disk.  When  you
   enter  CTRL/C, the prompt KS10> will be printed on the CTY.  Chapter 3
   describes how to load microcode from tape.

   Now that you have powered up the system, you can boot it as  described
   in  Chapter  3.   But  first, prepare the information you will need by
   following the instructions in the next section.



   2.5  PREPARING INFORMATION

   It is important to prepare the information that you will  need  during
   installation.   Because this information is lengthy, and may come from
   several sources, worksheets are provided to  record  the  information.
   Use  the  completed worksheets as reference during installation and to
   keep a record of the characteristics of the system.



   2.5.1  Worksheet 1

   If you are installing a new system, a Field Service Representative can
   provide   you   with   the   information  for  Worksheet  1,  Hardware
   Configuration.



   2.5.2  Worksheet 2

   Use Worksheet 2 to record the software  configuration.   The  software
   configuration  is  largely  the  responsibility of the system manager.


                                    2-5
                                PREPARATION


   Information to make the necessary decisions is provided in this manual
   and   in  other  documents  in  the  TOPS-10  Software  Notebook  Set.
   Questions should be directed to a DIGITAL Software Specialist.



   2.5.3  Worksheet 3

   Use Worksheet 3 to record disk characteristics.  The disk system  must
   be  defined for the monitor.  This is accomplished when you select the
   DEFINE startup option for the ONCE dialogue (see Appendix A).











































                                    2-6
                                PREPARATION


                                Worksheet 1
|  
|                            Hardware Worksheet
|  
|  
|  System name (24 characters maximum): ______________________________
|  
|  CPU type (KL or KS): ______________
|  
|  Number of CPUs (KL only): _________
|  
|  
|  CPU Serial Numbers
|  
|  
|       CPU0: ____________________
|  
|       CPU1: ____________________
|  
|       CPU2: ____________________
|  
|  
|  Total amount of system memory (KS 512K): ___________
|  
|                                (KL 768K): ___________
|  
|  Clock ticks (60,50): ___________
|  
|  

























                                    2-7
                                PREPARATION


|                               Worksheet 1
|  
|  
|  System Devices 
|  
|  
|  Answer YES or NO to the following questions.
|  
|  
|  Does the system have any of the following:
|  
|  
|       One or more CI-20 (SCA) subsystem interfaces? _____
|  
|       One or more NI-20 (Ethernet) subsystem interfaces? _____
|  
|       RP01/2/3 disks? _____
|  
|       Swapping drums? _____
|  
|       RS04/05 fixed-head disks? _____
|  
|       Any DX20/RP20 disk subsystems? _____
|  
|       CI-based disks (RA60/RA81)? _____





























                                    2-8
                                PREPARATION


|                               Worksheet 1
|  
|  
|  System Devices cont'd
|  
|  
|  Are any of the following kinds of magtape drives present:
|  
|  
|       TM02/TM03 controller-based drives (TU45/TU77s)? _____
|  
|       DX10/TX01/TX02-based drives (TU70/71/72s)? _____
|  
|       DX20/TX02-based drives (TU70/71/72s)? _____
|  
|       TM78 controller-based (TU78/79s)? _____
|  
|       TM10B controller-based (TU40/41s)? _____
|  
|       TM10C controller-based (TU43)? _____
|  
|  
|  Does the system have any of the following devices:
|  
|  
|       Line printers connected to the I/O Bus? _____
|  
|       Line printers connected to the Console Front End? _____
|  
|       XY10 I/O bus plotters? _____
|  
|       CR10 I/O bus card readers? _____
|  
|       CD20 CFE-based card readers? _____
|  
|       CP10/CP10D I/O bus card punches? _____
|  
|       Paper-tape punches? _____
|  
|       Paper-tape readers? _____














                                    2-9
                                PREPARATION


|                               Worksheet 1
|  
|  
|  Front Ends
|  
|  
|  Will any front ends be running: ANF-10?       _____
|  
|                                  DN60 IBMCOMM? _____
|  
|                                  DECnet-10?    _____
|  
|  How many terminal lines are there on CPU0?    _____
|  
|                                       CPU1?    _____
|  
|                                       CPU2?    _____
|  
|                                       CPU3?    _____
|  
|                                       CPU4?    _____
|  
|  TTY number for OPR (usually CTY)?             _____
|  
|  Which lines on your system are dataset lines? ________________
|  
|                                                ________________
|  
|                                                ________________
|  
|                                                ________________























                                    2-10
                                PREPARATION


|                               Worksheet 2
|  
|  
|                            Software Worksheet
|  
|  
|  Maximum number of jobs: _____________________
|  
|  Maximum amount of memory per job: _____________________
|  
|  Allow locking jobs? (Y or N): _____________________
|  
|  Minimum amount of memory for unlocked jobs: _____________________
|  
|  Number of real-time devices: _____________________
|  
|  Number of HPQs: ____________
|  
|  Number of PTYs: ____________
|  
|  
|  Monitor Services
|  
|  
|  Answer YES or NO to the following questions about user runtime
|  accounting:
|  
|       Exclude monitor overhead? _____
|  
|       Use EBOX/MBOX clocks? (KL only) _____
|  
|       Include PI time? (KL only) _____
|  
|       Account verification? _____
|  
|       Include MSGSER? _____     PSISER?  _____
|  
|               IPCF?   _____     ENQ/DEQ? _____
















                                    2-11
                                PREPARATION


|                               Worksheet 3
|  
|  
|                        Disk Parameters Worksheet
|  
|  
|  For each file structure, note the following:
|  
|  
|  Structure Name           Units in Structure
|  
|  ________________         __________________
|  
|                           __________________
|  
|                           __________________
|  
|  
|  Consecutive blocks tried on output: _______________
|  
|  Overdraw blocks allowed per user: _______________
|  
|  Private structure (YES or NO): _____
|  
|  Owner PPN: _____________
|  
|  Amount of space for crash file: ___________K
|  
|  Blocks per cluster: ____________  Bits per cluster count: ____________
|  
|  
|  Units 
|  
|  
|  For each unit, note the following:
|  
|  
|                                     SAT Blocks
|  Unit Name     Unit-id  SAT Blocks  in Core     Swap Space
|  
|  
|  _________     _______  __________  __________  _________K
|  
|  _________     _______  __________  __________  _________K
|  
|  _________     _______  __________  __________  _________K












                        PART 2: PREPARING THE SYSTEM




             This  part  is  made  up  of  four  chapters  that
             describe  the  preparatory procedures that must be
             accomplished  before  building  the  monitor   and
             tailoring  the  system.   If  you are upgrading an
             existing system, you should go to Part 3 now.











                                 CHAPTER 3

                             BOOTING THE SYSTEM



   This chapter describes how to load the bootstrap monitor from tape and
   how  to  boot  the  system.   The procedure for booting a KL system is
   described in Section 3.1.  The procedure for booting a  KS  system  is
   described in Section 3.2.



   3.1  BOOTING THE KL SYSTEM

   Before booting the KL system, you must mount the required media on the
   drives,  load  the  front  end, initialize the front end, and load the
   bootstrap monitor.  If you  are  unfamiliar  with  the  procedure  for
   mounting  software  media,  refer  to the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for
   instructions on mounting DECtapes, floppy diskettes, disk  packs,  and
   magtapes.

   The monitor, supporting CUSPS, and unbundled software are  distributed
   on  magnetic  tape.  The front end software is distributed on DECtapes
   or floppy  diskettes.   Perform  the  following  steps  to  mount  the
   distribution media and load the front end:

   Step                             Explanation

   1. Mount distribution media

      For DECtapes:                 Mount the  DECtape  labeled  DT-A  on
                                    Drive  0.   Mount the DECtape labeled
                                    DT-B on Drive 1.

      For floppy diskettes:         Mount the floppy labeled FLP-A in the
                                    left-hand  drive  unit,  DX0:.  Mount
                                    the  floppy  labeled  FLP-B  in   the
                                    right-hand drive unit, DX1:.
|  
|     Magnetic tape:                Check to see if there is a write ring
|                                   in  the  reel,  and  remove it before
|                                   mounting the bootable tape  on  Drive


                                    3-1
                             BOOTING THE SYSTEM


|                                   0.
|  
      Disk pack:                    You must also mount a disk pack  that
                                    the   system  can  access.   Mount  a
                                    properly formatted disk pack on RPmx,
                                    where   'm'   is   the   disk  unit's
                                    controller letter and 'x' is the unit
                                    number.     The    drive    must   be
                                    dual-ported between the front end and
                                    the  KL processor.  The drive RPA0 is
                                    used throughout this manual.

   2. Set the data switches on      To do this, raise the switches marked
      the front end control panel   0, 1, and 2 on the switch register to
      to 000007.                    the up position.  The  data  switches
                                    are off when down, on when up.

   3. Check control switches        The control switches to the right  of
                                    the   data  switches  should  all  be
                                    raised.   This  data  switch  setting
                                    causes  the  front end to run the CPU
                                    initialization dialogue (KLINIT)  for
                                    loading and configuring CPU memory.

   4. Hold the ENABLE switch on,    When  you  press these  switches, the
      press the SW/REG switch,      front  end  software  is  loaded from
      then release both.            DECtape    or    floppy    and    the
                                    initialization dialogue starts.




   3.1.1  Intializing the KL Front End

   At the CTY, type the responses underlined in the dialogue shown  below
   and  press  RETURN after typing each response.  You cannot type ahead;
   you must wait for the system to respond after you press  RETURN.   The
   dialogue  shown  here  is  reproduced  from  a DECsystem-1091, KL10-E,
   system startup.  Note that the messages printed  by  the  system  will
   differ  slightly  for  DECsystem-1090, KL10-D, systems, but you should
   type the same answers to the questions,  regardless  of  the  type  of
   system you are installing.

   The  KL  initialization  dialogue   (KLINIT)   starts   automatically,
   prompting  for  commands  with  KLI>.   Enter  the  responses that are
   underlined  in  the  following  example  dialogue.    Refer   to   the
   TOPS-10/TOPS-20   RSX-20F   Reference   Manual  for  a  more  thorough
   description of the KLINIT dialogue.

        RSX-20F VE##-## hh:mm mmm-dd-yy

        [SY0:  REDIRECTED TO DX0:]


                                    3-2
                             BOOTING THE SYSTEM


        [DX0:  MOUNTED]
        [DX1:  MOUNTED]
        KLI -- VERSION VA##-## RUNNING
        KLI -- ENTER DIALOGUE [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]?
        KLI>YES<RET>
        KLI -- KL10 S/N:  1042., MODEL B, 60 HERTZ
        KLI -- KL10 HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT:
                MCA25 CACHE PAGER
                MOS MASTER OSCILLATOR
                EXTENDED ADDRESSING
                INTERNAL CHANNELS
                CACHE
|  
|  The following question applies only to  installations  with  an  MCA25
|  cache  pager.   If you have an MCA25 cache pager, answer this question
|  with BOTH and press RETURN.
|  
|       KLI -- SELECT PAGE TABLE [FILE,BOTH,0,1]
|       KLI>BOTH<RET>
        KLI -- PAGE TABLE SELECTED:  BOTH
        KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?
        KLI>YES<RET>
        KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION ### LOADED
        KLI -- RECONFIGURE CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]?
        KLI>ALL<RET>
        KLI -- ALL CACHES ENABLED
        KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY [FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]?
        KLI>ALL<RET>

        LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION
        ADDRESS     SIZE     INT     TYPE     CONTROLLER
        000000000   768K      4      MF20         11

        KLI -- LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [FILE,YES,NO,FILENAME]?
        KLI>YES<RET>
        KLI -- WRITE CONFIGURATION FILE[YES,NO]?
        KLI>NO<RET>
        KLI --BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED
|       BOOT V#(##)
|  
|       BOOT>



   3.1.2  Booting the KL Monitor

|  At the BOOT> prompt, type the file specification of  the  monitor  you
|  are loading, followed by a switch to specify the tape drive controller
   name,  and  press  RETURN.   The  file  specification   is   optional,
   defaulting to the following:

        DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]/switch


                                    3-3
                             BOOTING THE SYSTEM


   Where '/switch' identifies the tape controller  for  the  tape  drive.
   One of the following switches may be used:

   /TM02 or /TM03      for TU45 and TU77 tape drives.  For  drives  other
                       than Unit 0, specify /TM02:u or /TM03:u, where 'u'
                       is the unit number.


   /TM10               for TU10, TU40, and TU41 tape drives.


   /TX01 or /TX02      for  TU70,  TU71,  TU72  tape  drives  on  a  DX10
                       channel.


   /DX20               for TU70, TU71, or TU72 on a DX20 channel.


|  /TM78:nx            for TU78/79 tape drives, where  'n'  is  a  single
|                      digit  for  the TM78's MASSBUS unit number and 'x'
|                      is a single digit for the slave unit number.
|  
                       [Loading from DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE [1,4]]

   When the system begins running, the system name is printed on the CTY:

                       KL10       mmm-dd-yy

   The ONCE  dialogue  starts  automatically  when  the  monitor  starts,
   allowing  you  to give the monitor the information it requires to run.
   Continue the installation procedure  with  Chapter  4,  "Starting  the
   Bootstrap Monitor".  If ONCE fails to start, repeat the procedure from
   Step 2 in Section 3.1.



   3.2  BOOTING THE KS SYSTEM

   Before booting the KS system, you must mount the required media on the
   drives.   The  monitor,  supporting  CUSPS, and unbundled software are
   distributed  on  magnetic  tape.   If  you  are  unfamiliar  with  the
   procedure for mounting software media, refer to the TOPS-10 Operator's
   Guide for instructions on mounting disk packs and magtapes.

|  First, you will mount the bootable tape.  Check to see if there  is  a
|  write  ring in the reel.  If present, remove it and mount the bootable
|  tape on tape drive 0.  You may use a drive  other  than  MTA0.   Next,
|  mount a formatted disk pack on disk drive 0.

   Start the bootstrapping procedure by typing MT to the KS10> prompt  on
|  the CTY.  The system responds by printing the BOOT> prompt on the CTY.



                                    3-4
                             BOOTING THE SYSTEM


|       KS10>MT<RET>
|       KS10>USR MOD
|  
|       BOOT V#(##)
|  
|       BOOT>
|  
|  At the BOOT> prompt, type the  file  specification  of  the  bootstrap
|  monitor  and  a  switch that specifies the tape drive controller, then
   press RETURN.  The file specification is optional, defaulting  to  the
   following:

        DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]/switch

   where '/switch' identifies the controller for  the  tape  drive.   The
   following switches may be used:

   /TM02 or /TM03 for TU45 and TU77 tape drives.

|  BOOT starts the loading procedure.
|  
|       [Loading from DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE [1,4]]
|  
|  When the system begins running, the system name is printed on the CTY:
|  
|       KS10       mmm-dd-yy
|  
|  The ONCE  dialogue  starts  automatically  when  the  monitor  starts,
|  allowing  you  to give the monitor the information it requires to run.
|  Continue the installation procedure  with  Chapter  4,  "Starting  the
|  Bootstrap Monitor".  If ONCE fails to start, repeat the procedure from
|  Section 3.2.






















                                    3-5
























































                                    4-1











                                 CHAPTER 4

                       STARTING THE BOOTSTRAP MONITOR



   This chapter describes how to start up  the  bootstrap  monitor  using
   standard  and  default  settings.   The  ONCE  program  always runs at
   monitor startup and offers several options to the way it can run.  For
   complete  information  about  ONCE, refer to Appendix A.  This chapter
   contains only the information  and  procedures  needed  to  start  the
   bootstrap monitor on a new installation using default disk parameters.
|  
|  ONCE allows the user to:
|  
|        o  Keep a record of the reason for starting or reloading the
|           system.
|  
|        o  Provide the date and time for the monitor.
|  
|        o  Define, change, and show structure and unit parameters.
|  
|        o  Define, change, and show the system lists -- the system
|           search list, the active swapping list, and the system dump
|           list.
|  
|        o  Start the monitor.



   4.1  THE ONCE DIALOGUE

   ONCE begins by printing, on the CTY, the system name and the date that
   the  monitor was created.  The system name can be changed when you run
|  the MONGEN dialogue described in Chapter 9.  After printing the system
|  name  and  date,  ONCE  scans memory to be sure that it is accessible.
|  Each monitor is built for a specific amount of memory.  When you build
|  your  monitor  using  MONGEN,  you  will  specify the amount of memory
|  needed for your installation.  Since you are installing a new  system,
|  you  may  receive  the  following message, indicating that the default
|  monitor was built to expect more memory than that which  is  currently
|  on-line:



                                    4-1
|       %Memory from xxxxxx to yyyyyy is off-line
|       Set memory (DOWN,OFFLIN,ONLINE) [OFFLIN]:
|  
|  For a new installation, you should type DOWN and press RETURN.
|  
|  If you are starting a multi-processor KL system (SMP) but have not yet
|  started the other CPUs, ONCE prints the following message:
|  
|       %CPU #nnnn is not running.  Set CPU status (DOWN,UP) [DOWN]:
|  
   If you have an SMP system, you can start the CPU indicated  by  typing
   UP and pressing RETURN.  ONCE then asks for the date by printing:

        Date:

   Enter the date in one of the following forms:

        MMM-DD-YY
   or
        DD-MMM-YY

   Where MMM is replaced by  the  name  of  the  month  (JANUARY  through
   DECEMBER)  abbreviated to the first three characters of the month name
   (JAN through DEC), DD is the numerical day of the  month  (01  through
   31) and YY is the year in a two digit year designation.  Both the year
   and the hyphens are optional.  After you  enter  the  date  and  press
   RETURN, ONCE asks for the time:

        Time:

   Enter the time in one of the following forms:

        HH:MM:SS
   or
        HHMMSS

   Where HH is replaced by the hour, based on  a  24-hour  clock,  MM  is
   replaced  by  the  minutes  past  the  hour, and SS is replaced by the
   seconds past the hour, with  optional  colons  separating  the  hours,
   minutes, and seconds.  Enter the time and press RETURN.

|  It is very important that you respond with the correct date and  time.
|  If  you  do  not,  users' files may be written with the wrong creation
|  dates, resulting in confusion and errors.  If you enter the wrong date
|  or  time,  you  may  correct  the  error later by selecting the CHANGE
|  startup option followed by  the  DATE  keyword.   The  CHANGE  startup
|  option is described in Appendix A.
|  
|  After receiving the time and date, ONCE asks the question:
|  
|       Why reload:
|  
|  This question is asked whenever  the  system  is  reloaded.   For  the
|  purpose  of  installing  a new system, you should answer this question
|  with NEW, and press RETURN.


                                    4-2
|  If you press RETURN without typing an answer, ONCE prints  a  list  of
|  the possible responses and their meanings.  If you type HELP and press
|  RETURN, you will be provided with a list of the possible responses and
|  a  brief  explanation of each.  These are also listed and described in
|  Appendix A, Section A.1.
|  
|  After this initial dialogue, ONCE prompts you for a startup option  by
|  printing:
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  If you type HELP and press return, ONCE lists the startup options  and
|  switches  and  a brief explanation of each.  These are also listed and
|  described in Appendix A, Section A.1.  This chapter describes  how  to
|  start  the  monitor  quickly  using  default values.  If you prefer to
|  define  file  structures  to  suit  the  particular  needs   of   your
|  installation, refer to Appendix A for more information.
|  
|  
|  
|  4.2  BRINGING UP A NEW SYSTEM
|  
|  The DESTROY option of the ONCE dialogue is a powerful  procedure  that
|  ensures that the disk parameters are properly defined for the monitor.
|  When the DESTROY option is used, the disks are refreshed, deleting all
|  files  on the disk.  The HOME and SAT blocks are initialized, deleting
|  all information about the  disk's  place  in  system  lists  and  file
|  structures.
|  
|  If used with disks that already contain data or structure definitions,
|  the  data  and  structure  information will be DESTROYed and rewritten
|  with default parameters.  For this reason, the  ONCE  program  ensures
|  that  you  want  to  perform  the DESTROY option by printing a warning
|  message before accepting the DESTROY startup option.  This warning  is
|  intended to prevent accidental destruction of disk data.
|  
|  However, when you are booting the monitor on a new  installation  with
|  unused  disk  units  and with no disk parameters set or defined, or if
|  your disk units contain unknown information, you may find this  option
|  useful.   Refer  to  Appendix  A, Table A-1, for a list of the DESTROY
|  option parameters.
|  
|  The  DEFINE  option  provides  reasonable  default  values  for   disk
|  parameters,  allows  you to create file structures that are useable by
|  the monitor, and to construct system lists from the units that are  on
|  line.
|  
|  To start the new installation quickly, follow the procedures  in  this
|  section.  To DEFINE structure and unit parameters to suit the needs of
|  your particular installation now, refer to  Appendix  A  for  complete
|  information about the DEFINE startup option.
|  
|  So far, you have provided a reason for the reload (NEW), have set  the
|  date  (in the format MMM-DD-YY or DD-MMM-YY) and have set the time (in
|  the format HH:MM:SS or HHMMSS).  Now, you are prompted for  a  startup


                                    4-3
|  option:
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  Enter DESTROY and press RETURN.  ONCE  will  respond  with  a  warning
|  message and will ask whether or not you want to proceed.  This warning
|  message helps to prevent accidental use of  the  DESTROY  option.   If
|  your  disks  have  usable data, or if your disk parameters are already
|  defined, do not proceed.  If you type NO or press RETURN  in  response
|  to this question, ONCE will prompt you for another startup option.
|  
|       %WARNING:  All structures will be refreshed.  All disk files
|       will be  destroyed.   All information on currently spinning packs
|       will be lost.  Do not proceed unless you are positive that you
|       want to do this.
|  
|       Proceed  (NO,YES) [NO]:
|  
|  Type YES and press RETURN.  When you do this the  parameters  will  be
|  set  and the disks will be refreshed.  When ONCE is finished with that
|  operation, it prints the following message:
|  
|       [HOME blocks initialized on all units]
|  
|  You are then prompted for a startup option.  Enter  DEFINE  and  press
|  return:
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE<RET>
|       Define (ASL,SDL,SSL,STRUCT):STRUCT<RET>
|  
|       In  the  following  dialogue,  all  numbers  are  decimal  unless
|       otherwise  indicated.  Values within square brackets are defaults
|       which will be substituted if RETURN is pressed.
|  
|       Any question preceded with an asterisk  indicates  changing  that
|       parameter will require the structure to be refreshed.
|  
|  
|                                     Note 
|       HOME blocks will be initialized immediately after  all  units  in
|       the structure have been entered.
|  It is advisable that you define at least one  structure  to  be  DSKB.
|  All  examples  in  this manual use DSKB as the area to which files are
|  copied.
|  
|       Structure to define:DSKB<RET>
|  
|       Disk drive for logical unit 0:RPxn<RET>
|       Disk drive for logical unit 1:RPxn<RET>
|       Do you want to see the bad regions (NO,YES) [NO]:NO<RET>
|  
|       [HOME blocks initialized on RPxn]
|       Initialize BAT blocks (NO,YES) [NO]:YES<RET>
|  
|       [BAT blocks initialized on RPxn]


                                    4-4
|  In the following  section,  default  values  are  enclosed  in  square
|  brackets.   Default  values  are  calculated  by ONCE according to the
|  structure type.  Accept the default value by pressing RETURN.
|  
|       Parameters for structure DSKB
|          *Blocks per cluster (3 - 262143) [10]:
|           Private structure (NO,YES) [NO]:
|           Owner PPN [NONE]:
|           Disk-set (1-36,ALL,NONE) [ALL]:
|          *Number of K for CRASH.EXE (0 - 4096) [4096]:
|           Blocks allowed for overdraw per user (0 - 307800) [500]:
|           Consecutive blocks tried for on output 90 - 262143) [30]:
|          *Bits per cluster count (0 - 18) [12]:
|           Make this the only structure in the SSL (NO,YES) [YES]:
|           Make this the only structure in the SDL (NO,YES) [YES]:
|  
|  In the following section, first specify a unit  identification.   This
|  identification resides in the HOME blocks on the disk unit, for unique
|  identification of the disk pack.  Therefore, it  should  be  a  unique
|  number  that will never conflict with another code.  Every pack should
|  have a unit-id of six alphanumeric characters that may be a portion of
|  the pack's serial number.
|  
|       Parameters for unit RPxn
|           Unit ID [XXXXn]:
|  
|  For all other questions, accept the default value by pressing RETURN.
|  
|          *SAT blocks per unit (8 - 81) [8]:
|           SAT blocks in core (1 - 8) [8]:
|          *K for swapping (0 - 4807) [4807]:
|          *First logical block for swapping (33090 - 269332) [134672]:
|           Swapping class (0 - 1) [0]:
|           Make this the only unit in the ASL (NO,YES) [YES]:
|  
|       Structure to define:
|  
|  Enter another structure to define or press  RETURN  and  you  will  be
|  prompted  for another startup option.  To start the monitor now, enter
|  NOINITIA and press RETURN:
|  
|       Startup option:NOINITIA<RET>
|  
|       [Rebuilding the system search list from the HOM blocks]
|  
|       [Rebuilding the active swapping list from the HOM blocks]
|  
|       [Rebuilding the system dump list from the HOM blocks]
|  
|       [HOM blocks updated]
|  
|       To automatically log in under [1,2] type "LOGIN"
|  
|       TOPS-10 7.04 System Friday mmm-dd-yy hh:mm:ss



                                    4-5
|       .
























































                                    4-6











                                 CHAPTER 5

                      BUILDING THE MONITOR FILE SYSTEM



   Before you can build your monitor you  must  build  the  monitor  file
|  system.   To  do  this, you will restore files from the bootable tape,
|  which you mounted before running ONCE,  and  from  the  Monitor/ANF-10
|  tape, which contains the sources for the monitor and ANF-10.  You will
|  restore files from the CUSP, or Commonly  Used  System  Program  tape.
|  The  files  for  the  GALAXY batch and spooling system are included on
|  this tape.
|  
   This chapter also explains how to restore  files  from  the  unbundled
   software  tape,  the customer-supported tape, and the TOOLS tape.  All
   procedures apply to both KL and KS systems unless otherwise  noted  in
   the section title.

|  Before you can restore files from the bootable tape, you must assign a
   name  to  the tape.  You mounted this tape when you booted the system,
   before running ONCE.  The tape drive is identified to the monitor  for
   your  job  using  the following monitor command.  On the CTY, type the
   following:

        .ASSIGN MTA0: TAPE:<RET>

   The system responds with:
|  
|       MTA0 assigned
|  
|  This command assigns the name TAPE to the  tape  unit  MTA0.   If  the
|  bootable  tape  is on a different tape drive, use the correct physical
   device name.

   Next, if you are installing a KL system, Section 5.1 will show you how
   to  restore  the  file  that is used to allocate space on disk for the
   front end file system.

   Then, for both KL and KS systems, Section 5.2 will  show  you  how  to
   restore  the  BACKUP program, which will be used to copy the bootstrap
   monitor from tape to disk.  If you are installing a  KS  system,  skip
   Section 5.1 and go directly to Section 5.2.


                                    5-1
   5.1  ALLOCATING DISK SPACE FOR THE KL FRONT END

   This section describes how to restore a file that is used to  allocate
   space for the front end file system.  On the CTY, type the following:

        .GET TAPE:FEFILE<RET>

   The system will respond with:

        Job setup
        .

                                    NOTE

           This command may result in an  error  message  of  the
           form:

           ?Transmission error

           If a transmission error occurs, reposition the tape to
           make  another  attempt  to  obtain the FEFILE program.
           Push the rewind button on the tape drive and wait  for
           the  tape to rewind.  Then, type the GET command twice
           as shown below:

           .GET TAPE:FEFILE<RET>
           Job setup
           .GET TAPE:FEFILE<RET>
           Job setup
           .

   Now that the FEFILE job is set up, you will allocate space on  a  disk
   unit  for  the front end file system.  At the . prompt, type START and
   press RETURN:

        .START<RET>

   The system will respond with:

        DISK UNIT NAME:

   Enter a disk unit  name  and  press  RETURN.   The  following  example
   assumes that the front end file system will be stored on the disk unit
|  RPA0.  You may specify any physical disk unit for RPA0, but  the  disk
|  must  be  dual-ported between the front end and the KL, and must be an
|  RP06 drive type.
|  
        DISK UNIT NAME:RPA0:<RET>

   The system will respond with:

        SIZE OF FILE IN BLOCKS (<CRLF> GIVES DEFAULT OF 2000):

   Press RETURN to accept the default file size.  There may  be  a  delay
   before  the front end completes this operation.  When the operation is


                                    5-2
   complete, the system will respond with:

        [2008 DATA BLOCKS ALLOCATED TO FE.SYS]
        [FE.SYS AREA STARTS AT LOGICAL BLOCK 2301.]
        [FRONT END FILE CREATED, HOM BLOCKS WRITTEN]

   Next, you will restore the BACKUP program.



   5.2  RESTORING BACKUP FROM TAPE

   This section shows you how to restore the BACKUP  program.   You  will
|  use  BACKUP  to  copy  the  bootstrap monitor from tape to disk and to
|  restore  the  files  from  the   Monitor/ANF-10   tape,   CUSP   tape,
|  customer-supported  tape,  any unbundled software tapes, and the TOOLS
|  tape.

   The following example shows how to  restore,  save,  and  run  BACKUP.
   Enter the commands that are underscored in the example:

        .GET TAPE:BACKUP<RET>
        Job setup
        .SAVE BACKUP<RET>
        BACKUP saved
        .RUN BACKUP<RET>
        /

   The / sign is the BACKUP prompt, indicating that BACKUP is running and
   is  ready  to  accept  BACKUP  commands.   Next  you  will restore the
   bootstrap monitor.  When that  is  completed,  you  will  restore  the
   monitor  sources  and  associated  software.   The  BACKUP  program is
   discussed in the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide.  This manual shows only the
   commands  you  need  to type to restore the monitor and its supporting
   software.



   5.3  RESTORING FILES FROM TAPE TO DISK

   The examples in this manual use DSKB as the  structure  to  which  the
   files will be copied, and the area [10,7] for the directory area.  The
   BACKUP program recognizes the ersatz device name  DEC  as  SSL:[10,7],
   therefore  the  procedures  in  this manual use the device name DEC to
   represent DSKB:[10,7].  The area [1,4] is reserved for  ersatz  device
   SYS,  from  which  system programs are run.  Do not substitute another
   directory area for [1,4].  The  procedures  in  this  manual  use  the
   device name SYS to represent DSKB:[1,4].



   5.3.1  Restoring the Bootstrap Monitor

|  Now, you will restore the bootstrap monitor from  the  bootable  tape.
|  For KL systems, type the following commands after the / prompt:


                                    5-3
        /TAPE TAPE:<RET>
        /SUPERSEDE ALWAYS<RET>
        /RESTORE SYS:=*.*<RET>
        "DONE
        /

   For KS systems, type the following commands:

        /TAPE TAPE:<RET>
        /SUPERSEDE ALWAYS<RET>
        /INTERCHANGE<RET>
        /RESTORE SYS:=*.*<RET>
        "DONE
        /RESTORE DEC:=*.*<RET>
        "DONE

|  Unload the bootable tape.  To do this, for both  KL  and  KS  systems,
|  type the following command:
|  
|       /UNLOAD TAPE:<RET>
|       [MTA0:  Read(C/H/S) = 7202000/0/0]
|  
   This command rewinds the tape and unloads it.  Remove  the  tape  from
   the drive.

   The next section describes how to use BACKUP to restore the files from
|  the  Monitor/ANF-10  tape, from any unbundled software tapes, from the
   CUSP tape, the customer-supported tape, and the TOOLS tape.
|  
|  
|  
|  5.3.2  Restoring the Monitor Sources and Associated Software
|  
   To copy the files from tape to disk, you must mount,  restore,  unload
   and  dismount  each  tape.   You  may  restore the tapes in any order,
   unless otherwise noted in the cover letter included with the  specific
   tape.

   Repeat the procedure below for each distribution tape,  starting  with
|  the Monitor/ANF-10 tape.

        1.  Mount the distribution tape.

        2.  Type the following commands to restore the files:

            /TAPE TAPE:<RET>
            /REWIND<RET>
            /SUPERSEDE ALWAYS<RET>
            /PROTECTION 155<RET>
            /SSNAME ALL<RET>
            /RESTORE DSKB:<RET>
            !10,7 DSKB
            "DONE
            /UNLOAD TAPE:<RET>
            [MTA0:  Read(C/H/S) = 7752000/0/0]


                                    5-4
        3.  Dismount the tape.

   After the files are on disk, exit  from  BACKUP  by  typing  EXIT  and
   pressing RETURN.  Now you can create the TOPS-10 disk file system.  To
   do this,  you  will  create  the  system  directories  then  copy  the
   appropriate files into each directory.



   5.4  CREATING THE TOPS-10 SYSTEM DIRECTORIES

   The TOPS-10 monitor requires certain disk directories  from  which  it
   can  access  support  programs  and  CUSPs.   You  will  create  these
   directories on disk, then copy the files from the DSKB:[10,7] area  to
   those  directories.  The monitor recognizes the ersatz device name DEC
   as DSKB:[10,7].  Therefore,  the  device  name  DEC  is  used  in  the
   following procedures.

   The program that creates directories is CREDIR.  The CREDIR program is
   described in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.  Only the commands you
   need to complete this procedure are demonstrated below.

   In the following procedure, the ersatz device names recognized by  the
   monitor  are  used  to  create the appropriate directories for storing
   monitor files.  Each ersatz device name results in  a  directory  area
   with  the  standard PPN that the monitor reserves for that purpose.  A
   directory for the specified PPN will be created on each file structure
   in the system search list, unless you specify otherwise.

   The ersatz device names used in this manual are defined as follows:

        PPN       Name      Use
|  
|       [10,7]    DEC:      DEC-supplied software
|  
        [1,4]     SYS:      System library

        [2,5]     HLP:      HELP files

        [5,14]    DOC:      DOC files

        [5,11]    REL:      REL files

        [5,17]    UNV:      MACRO universal files

        [1,7]     ACT:      Accounting daemon files (ACTDAE)

   Use the following commands to create the  ersatz  device  directories.
   The  directory  areas  will  be  created on each file structure in the
   system search list.  CREDIR will report on each directory  it  creates
   on  each  file  structure.   In  this  example,  DSKB is the only file
   structure in the system search  list.   Type  the  commands  that  are
   underscored in the following examples:

        .RUN DEC:CREDIR<RET>


                                    5-5
   CREDIR will prompt you for the directory name you wish to create:

        Create directory:HLP:<RET> Created DSKB0:[2,5].UFD/PROTECTION:775

   Repeat for each directory name:

        Create directory:DOC:<RET>
           Created DSKB0:[5,14].UFD/PROTECTION:775

        Create directory:REL:<RET>
           Created DSKB0:[5,11].UFD/PROTECTION:775

        Create directory:UNV:<RET>
           Created DSKB0:[5,17].UFD/PROTECTION:775

        Create directory:ACT:<RET>
           Created DSKB0:[1,7].UFD/PROTECTION:775

   To exit from CREDIR, type CTRL/C:

        Create directory:<CTRL/C>

        .




   5.5  COPYING THE FILES INTO DIRECTORIES

   This section shows you how  to  copy  the  files  from  DEC  into  the
|  appropriate  directories.   You will copy the files to the appropriate
|  areas from DEC, using the NFT (Network File Transfer) program.  NFT is
|  described in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.
|  
|  The NFT prompt is an *.  To run NFT, type the following command:
|  
|       .RUN DSKB:NFT[10,7,NFT]<RET>
|       *
|  
|  To copy files you only need to use the COPY command  as  shown  below.
|  Use  the  COPY  command to copy the files into their appropriate areas
|  from DEC:
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.EXE<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.RAM,DEC:*.VFU<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:DDT.REL,DEC:JOBDAT.REL<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:OVRLAY.REL,DEC:TECO.ERR<RET>
|  
|       *COPY HLP:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.HLP<RET>
|  
|       *COPY DOC:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.DOC<RET>



                                    5-6
|       *COPY REL:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.REL<RET>
|  
|       *COPY UNV:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.UNV<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:SYSTEM.CMD<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.SYS<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:/PROTECTION:055=DEC:*.INI<RET>
|  
|  For KL systems, also copy the following files as shown:
|  
|       *COPY SYS:=DEC:DXMCA.ADX,DEC:DXMPA.A8,DEC:DXMCD.ADX<RET>
|  
|       *COPY SYS:=DEC:KNICOD.BIN,DEC:FEUIC.TXT<RET>
|  
|  For KS systems, copy the following files as shown:
|  
|       *COPY SYS:=DEC:SMFILE.EXE<RET>
|  
|  To exit from NFT, type EXIT and press RETURN:
|  
|       *EXIT<RET>
|       .
|  
   If you have not yet read the beware files, read them now.  To find out
   what .BWR files are available, type the following:

        .DIR *.BWR[10,7,*,*,*,*,*]

   You can display the files on your terminal using the TYPE command.  Be
   sure to read all the files listed by the DIR command.

   Next, if you are installing a KL system,  you  will  create  the  file
   system for the front end.  If you are installing a KS system, you will
   create the file system for the microprocessor.   Chapter  6  describes
   these procedures.




















                                    5-7
























































                                    6-1











                                 CHAPTER 6

             BUILDING THE SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSOR'S FILE SYSTEM



   The KL and KS processors are each supported by another processor.  The
   KL  processor uses a PDP-11 front end for I/O, which requires space on
   disk for its software.  The KS system uses an 8080 microprocessor that
   also  requires  disk  space  for  storage.   This chapter explains the
   procedure for creating these disk file systems.  If you are installing
   a KL system, continue reading with Section 6.1.  If you are installing
   a KS system, go directly to Section 6.2.



   6.1  BUILDING THE KL FRONT END FILE SYSTEM

   To build the front end file system, you must load the front  end  from
   the  front  end media, which you mounted according to the instructions
   in Chapter 3.   The  front  end  software  is  distributed  on  either
   DECtapes  or floppy diskettes.  The commands that you will type to the
   RSX-20F command language processor, the PARSER,  differ  primarily  in
   the  physical device names used.  The examples used to illustrate your
   communication with  the  PARSER,  if  not  specifically  separated  by
   appropriate  headings,  apply  to  both DECtapes and floppies.  In all
   examples, the commands that you will type are underscored.

   The following procedures assume that the front end file system will be
   stored  on  DSKB, mounted on RPA0.  In fact, you can use any structure
   by replacing DB0 in the commands with  DBn,  where  'n'  is  the  unit
   number  in RPxn.  Make sure that the disk unit is write-enabled and is
   dual-ported between the front end and the KL.

   KL systems may have  more  than  one  CPU  by  implementing  Symmetric
   Multi-Processing  (SMP).   In  a  multiple-CPU  system, each CPU has a
   front end, and each front end requires its own file  system.   If  you
   are  installing  an  SMP  system, you must follow the steps in Section
   6.1.1 and 6.1.2 for each CPU, at each CTY.

   For DECtapes:

   First, check to make sure that the DECtapes are mounted correctly.


                                    6-1
   The DECtape labelled DT-A should be mounted on DECtape drive 0,  DT0:,
   and the unit selector switch should be set to 0.  The DECtape labelled
   DT-B should be mounted on DECtape drive 1, DT1:, and the unit selector
   switch  should  be  set  to  1.   On  both  DT0:   and  DT1:,  set the
   LOCAL/REMOTE switch to REMOTE  and  the  READ/WRITE  switch  to  WRITE
   ENABLE.

   For floppies:

   First, check to make sure the floppy diskettes are mounted correctly.

   The floppy diskette labelled FLP-A should be mounted in the  left-hand
   floppy  drive  DX0:,  and the floppy diskette labelled FLP-B should be
   mounted in the right-hand floppy drive DX1:.



   6.1.1  Loading the Front End

   Invoke the PARSER by typing CTRL/\  (control-backslash)  on  the  CTY.
   This control character is not echoed, but the PARSER responds with the
   prompt PAR>, indicating that it is ready to accept commands.

                                    NOTE

           If you make an error at any time during your  dialogue
           with  the PARSER, type CTRL/Z followed by CTRL/\.  The
           PARSER prompt will be printed, and you can retype  the
           command.

           If you are loading  RSX-20F  from  DECtape,  allow  at
           least 45 minutes to copy the files.

   Type the SET CONSOLE MAINTENANCE and RESET commands to ensure that the
   KL is not running.

        <CTRL/\>
        PAR>SET CONSOLE MAINTENANCE<RET>
        CONSOLE MODE:  MAINTENANCE
        PAR>RESET<RET>

        PAR#

   Set the data switches on the front end control panel to  000003,  with
   the first two switches (0 and 1) raised and the rest off.

   Hold the ENABLE switch on and, at the  same  time,  press  the  SW/REG
   switch.   The  front end will print its software name and date and the
   location of the front end software.

   For DECtapes:                      For floppies:

   RSX-20F VA##-## hh:mm dd-mmm-yy    RSX-20F VA##-## hh:mm dd-mmm-yy

   [SY0:  REDIRECTED TO DT0:]         [SY0:  REDIRECTED TO DX0:]


                                    6-2
   [DT0:  MOUNTED]                    [DX0:  MOUNTED]
   [DT1:  MOUNTED]                    [DX1:  MOUNTED]

   Initialize the front end by running the INIalization program.  The INI
   program  does  not  prompt  when  initialization  is  complete.   When
   initialization is  complete,  the  lights  on  the  drive  panel  stop
   flashing.   First,  invoke  the  parser by typing CTRL/\, and type the
   following commands:

        <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR INI<RET>
        INI>DB0:<RET>
        INI><CTRL/Z>

   Mount the disk unit on which the front end file  system  will  reside.
   Run the MOUnt program by typing the following commands:

        <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR MOU<RET>
        MOU>DB0:<RET>

        MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETED
        MOU><CTRL/Z>

   Create the front end file system directory.  Run the  UFD  program  by
   typing the following commands:

        <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR UFD<RET>
        UFD>DB0:[5,5]<RET>
        UFD><CTRL/Z>

   The UFD program does not prompt the CTY when it is finished.  When the
   lights on the front panel stop flashing, the operation is complete.

   If you are loading the front end from  DECtapes,  you  will  copy  the
   *.TSK files into directories before copying the rest of the files.  If
   you are loading the front end from floppies, you will copy all of  the
   files  now.   Run  the  PIP  program to copy the files from DECtape or
   floppy to disk.  Exit from PIP by typing CTRL/Z.  Type  the  following
   commands:

        For DECtapes:                      For floppies:

        <CTRL/\>                           <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR PIP<RET>                   PAR#MCR PIP<RET>
        PIP>DB0:=DT0:F11ACP.TSK<RET>       PIP>DB0:=DX0:,DX1<RET>
        PIP>DB0:=DT0:PARSER.TSK<RET>
        PIP>DB0:=DT1:PIP.TSK<RET>

        PIP><CTRL/Z>                       PIP><CTRL/Z>


                                    6-3
   Redirect the system.  Run the REDirect program to redirect the  system
   search  area (SY0) from DECtape or floppy to disk.  Type the following
   commands:

        <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR RED<RET>
        RED>DB0:=SY0:<RET>
        RED><CTRL/Z>

   If you are loading the front end from DECtape, you will copy the  rest
   of  the  files from DECtape to disk.  This may take 25 minutes or more
   to complete.  When this has been completed, list the directory of  all
   the  files in SY0 and exit from PIP.  If you are loading the front end
   from floppies, you have already copied the files and only need to list
   the directory.  Type the following commands:

        For DECtapes:                      For floppies:

        <CTRL/\>                           <CTRL/\>
        PAR#MCR PIP<RET>                   PAR#MCR PIP<RET>

        PIP>DB0:=DT0:,DT1:<RET>
        PIP>DB0:/LI<RET>                   PIP>DB0:/LI<RET>
        PIP><CTRL/Z>                       PIP><CTRL/Z>

   Write front end monitor to SY0.  Run the SAVe  program  to  write  the
   front  end  monitor  to SY0.  It is already defined as DB0:[5,5].  The
   DECtapes or floppies and disk are logically dismounted  automatically.
   PIP  will  print  warning messages about the files that already exist,
   but you may ignore these messages.  Type the following commands:

        For DECtapes:                      For floppies:

        <CTRL/\>                           <CTRL/\>

        PAR#SET CONSOLE OPERATOR<RET>      PAR#SET CONSOLE OPERATOR<RET>
        PAR#MCR SAV<RET>                   PAR#MCR SAV<RET>
        SAV>SY0:/WB<RET>                   SAV>SY0:/WB<RET>

        [DB0:  DISMOUNTED]                 [DB0:  DISMOUNTED]
        [DT0:  DISMOUNTED]                 [DX0:  DISMOUNTED]
        [DT1:  DISMOUNTED]                 [DX1:  DISMOUNTED]

   For DECtapes:

   Remove the DECtapes from  drives  0  and  1,  and  mount  the  DECtape
   labelled DT-C on drive DT0:.

   For floppies:

   Remove the floppies from DX0:  and DX1:  and mount the floppy labelled
   FLP-C in drive DX0:.

   Type the following commands:


                                    6-4
        For DECtapes:                      For floppies:

        <CTRL/\>                           <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR MOU<RET>                   PAR#MCR MOU<RET>
        MOU>DT0:<RET>                      MOU>DX0:<RET>

        MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE              MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE
        MOU><CTRL/Z>                       MOU><CTRL/Z>

   Copy the files to disk.  Run PIP to copy  the  files  from  the  third
   DECtape  or  floppy  to  disk  and list the directory of files on DB0.
   Then, exit from PIP, dismount the DECtape or  floppy  and  remove  the
   media from the drive.  Type the following commands:

        For DECtapes:                      For floppies:

        <CTRL/\>                           <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR PIP<RET>                   PAR#MCR PIP<RET>
        PIP>DB0:=DT0:<RET>                 PIP>DB0:=DX0:<RET>
        PIP>TT:=DB0:/LI<RET>               PIP>TT:=DB0:/LI<RET>
        PIP><CTRL/Z>                       PIP><CTRL/Z>

        <CTRL/\>                           <CTRL/\>

        PAR#MCR DMO<RET>                   PAR#MCR DMO<RET>
        DMO>DT0:<RET>                      DMO>DX0:<RET>
        DMO -- DISMOUNT COMPLETED          DMO -- DISMOUNT COMPLETED
        DMO><CTRL/Z>                       DMO><CTRL/Z>

   You can now boot the RSX-20F front end from the disk.  This  procedure
   is described in Section 6.2



   6.1.2  Booting the KL Front End from Disk

   To initiate the load, hold the ENABLE switch on  and  press  the  DISK
   switch  at  the  same  time.   These switches are located on the drive
   panel.  Following is the output when the front end is loaded:

        RSX-20F VA##-## hh:mm dd-mmm-yy

        [SY0:  REDIRECTED TO DB0:]
        [DB0:  MOUNTED]

        KLI -- VERSION VA##-## RUNNING
        KLI -- MICROCODE ### LOADED
        KLI -- ALL CACHE ENABLED
        LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION
        ADDRESS SIZE INT TYPE CONTROLLER
        00000000 768K 4 MF20 11
        KLI -- CONFIGURATION FILE WRITTEN
        KLI -- BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED


                                    6-5
        BOOT V#(##)
        [Loading from DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE [1,4]]

        BOOT>

   You load the monitor by typing commands to the BOOT program.  To  load
   the  bootstrap  monitor  just  press  RETURN  to the BOOT prompt.  The
   default file name is DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4].

   The ONCE dialogue  begins  automatically.   The  startup  options  are
   described  in  Appendix  A.   For  a quick startup, use the GO startup
   option.

   If you are installing a multiple-processor KL, repeat  the  procedures
   in Section 6.1 at the console for each CPU.

   Section 6.2 describes the procedure for installing the  microprocessor
   file  system on KS systems.  If you are installing a KL system, choose
   a ONCE startup option then go directly to Chapter 7.



   6.2  CREATING THE KS MICROPROCESSOR FILE SYSTEM

   This section describes the procedure for creating the file system  for
   the KS microprocessor, and for booting the monitor.



   6.2.1  Creating a Front end File System Directory Area

   If you are installing a new KS system, you  must  create  a  directory
   area  on  disk  for the microprocessor file system.  This area must be
   [6,2020], and it is  recommended  that  you  use  the  structure  that
   resides  on  RPA0.   Do not use a multiple-unit file structure for the
   microprocessor file system.

   To create the directory area, type the following commands:

        .R CREDIR<RET>
        Create directory:DSKB:[6,2020]/EXIT<RET>
        Created DSKB0:[6,2020].UFD/PROTECTION:775

        .



   6.2.2  Writing the Bootstrap Program to Disk

   Next, you will write the bootstrap program to disk.  To do  this,  run
   the  SMFILE program as shown below.  You must supply the serial number
   for your system's CPU.  Note that the following  example  uses  a  CPU
   serial number of 4097.

        .RUN DEC:SMFILE<RET>


                                    6-6
        DECSYSTEM 2020 DIAGNOSTICS FE-FILE PROGRAM
        VERSION #.#, TOPS-10, KS10, CPU =4097
        [FOR HELP TYPE "HELP"]
|  
|       SMFILE>WRITE SETUP DSKB:<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE RESET<RET>
|       SMFILE>READ DEC:T10KL.RAM<RET>
|       SMFILE>SERIAL 4097<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE CRAM<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE BOOT DEC:KSBOOT.EXE<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE DONE<RET>
|       SMFILE>EXIT<RET>
|  
        EXIT
        .

   The KS is now ready to run.  Reload the monitor  using  the  following
   commands:

        <CTRL/\>

        KS10>HA<RET>
|  
|  When the CPU is halted, press the RESET buttons on the CPU panel.
|  
|       KS10 CSL.V#.#
|       BT AUTO
|       BOOT V#(#)
|  
|       BOOT><RET>
|  
|       [Loading from DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE [1,4]]
|  
|  You can load the monitor by typing commands to the BOOT  program.   To
|  load  the  default  monitor just press RETURN to the BOOT prompt.  The
|  default file  name  is  DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4].   To  load  a  different
|  monitor,  type the file name of the monitor to the BOOT prompt, taking
|  care  to  include  the  structure  name  and  the  complete  directory
|  specification.
|  
|  The ONCE dialogue  begins  automatically.   The  startup  options  are
|  described  in  Appendix  A.   For  a quick startup, use the GO startup
|  option.  After you choose a startup option, go on  to  Chapter  9  for
|  information about building your monitor.













                                    6-7












                    PART 3: UPGRADING AN EXISTING SYSTEM




             This part contains two chapters which describe how
             to  prepare  your  system  for  upgrade  to  a new
             version of the monitor.  If you are  installing  a
             new  system,  go directly to Part 4, "Building the
             Monitor".











                                 CHAPTER 7

                  RESTORING THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPES



|  Before you can customize the monitor for your  installation  you  must
|  copy  the  TOPS-10  monitor  and  CUSPs from the distribution tapes to
|  disk.  The monitor sources and associated software  must  be  restored
|  manually.   The  files  on  the  DECnet,  CUSP  and  TOOLS tape may be
|  restored  automatically  using  the  BACKUP  indirect  command   files
|  supplied with each tape.
|  
|  Existing KS installations require some of the files from the  bootable
|  tape.   These  files are not compatible with previous versions and are
|  required for building the microprocessor  file  system.   If  you  are
|  upgrading  a  KS  system,  you will copy these files from the bootable
|  tape before copying  the  TOPS-10  monitor  and  CUSPs.   If  you  are
|  upgrading  a  KS  system,  mount  the  bootable  tape now.  If you are
|  upgrading a KL system, mount the Monitor/ANF-10 tape.
|  
|  For  existing  systems  already  running  GALAXY,  ensure   that   the
|  tape-drive  you  are  using  is  not available to MDA by using the OPR
|  command SET TAPE-DRIVE.  MTA0 is used in the following example; if the
|  distribution  tape  is  on a different drive, use the correct physical
|  device name.
|  
|       .R OPR<RET>
|       OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA0 UNAVAILABLE
|       Enter text and terminate with ^Z<CTRL/Z>
|       ^Z
|       OPR>
|       10:29:36     Device MTA0  --  Unavailable for use  --
|       OPR>EXIT<RET>
|       .
|  
   For both KL and KS systems, assign a name to the tape  by  typing  the
   following command:

        .ASSIGN MTA0: TAPE:<RET>
|  
|  The system responds with:



                                    7-1
                  RESTORING THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPES


|       MTA0 ASSIGNED
|  
   This command assigns the name TAPE to the tape unit MTA0.

   The procedures for copying files from tape  to  disk  use  the  BACKUP
   program.  At the . prompt, type the following:

        .R BACKUP<RET>
        /

   The / sign is the BACKUP prompt, indicating that BACKUP is running and
   is  ready  to accept BACKUP commands.  The BACKUP program is discussed
   in the TOPS-10 Operator's Guide.  This manual shows only the  commands
   you need to type to restore the monitor and its supporting software.

   If you are upgrading a KS system, continue with Section 7.1.   If  you
   are upgrading a KL system, go directly to Section 7.2.



   7.1  RESTORING KS MICROPROCESSOR FILES

   The following commands allow  you  to  restore  the  files  needed  to
   upgrade  a  KS microprocessor file system.  Type the commands that are
   underscored in the following procedure:

|       /TAPE TAPE:<RET>
|       /SUPERSEDE ALWAYS<RET>
|       /INTERCHANGE<RET>
|       /RESTORE DEC:=SMFILE.EXE<RET>
|       "DONE
|       /RESTORE DEC:=T10KL.RAM<RET>
|       "DONE
|       /RESTORE DEC:=KSBOOT.EXE<RET>
|       "DONE
|       /UNLOAD TAPE:<RET>
|       [MTA0:  Read(C/H/S) = 7752000/0/0]
|  
|  Remove the bootable tape from the drive and mount  the  Monitor/ANF-10
|  tape.  Then, proceed with the instructions in Section 7.2.



   7.2  RESTORING THE MONITOR SOURCES AND ASSOCIATED SOFTWARE

|  The following procedure restores the monitor  sources  and  associated
|  software into DSKB:[10,7].  If you wish to restore the tape to an area
|  other than DSKB:[10,7], you must specify this  area  in  the  /RESTORE
|  command  line  as shown on the right in the example below.  To restore
|  the monitor sources and associated software, type  the  commands  that
|  are underscored:



                                    7-2
                  RESTORING THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPES


|       /TAPE TAPE:<RET>
|       /REWIND<RET>
|       /SUPERSEDE ALWAYS<RET>
|       /PROTECTION 155<RET>
|       /SSNAME ALL<RET>
|       /RESTORE DSKB:<RET>      or    /RESTORE FOO:=DSKB:
        !10,7 DSKB
        "DONE
        /UNLOAD TAPE:<RET>
|       [MTA0:  Read(C/H/S) = 7752000/0/0]
|  
   Remove the tape from the drive.



   7.3  RESTORING TAPES USING COMMAND FILES

   The  DECnet  tape,  CUSP  tape,  and  TOOLS  tape   each   include   a
   corresponding  BACKUP indirect command file.  The command file is used
   to restore the files directly into its appropriate UFD or SFD.

   Each indirect command file is stored on the tape for which it  can  be
   used:

         o  The first CUSP tape contains CUSPS.RST.

         o  The DECnet tape contains DECNET.RST.

         o  The TOOLS tape contains TOOLS.RST.

|  When you use the supplied indirect  command  files,  BACKUP  does  not
|  store  the  files  into the build area (ersatz device DEC) used in the
|  manual procedure described Section in 5.4.  It is very important  that
|  you check the commands in the indirect command file before you execute
|  it, and adjust ersatz device references to apply  to  the  directories
|  used in your system.
|  
|  For each tape, you will:
|  
|        o  Mount the tape and restore the indirect command file.
|  
|        o  Check the ersatz device references contained in the  indirect
|           command file, and adjust them if necessary.
|  
|        o  Execute the indirect command file.
|  
   The following example shows  the  commands  to  type  to  restore  the
   indirect command files from each tape.

        /TAPE TAPE:<RET>
        /REWIND<RET>
        /INTERCHANGE<RET>


                                    7-3
                  RESTORING THE MONITOR DISTRIBUTION TAPES


        /SUPERSEDE ALWAYS<RET>
        /PROTECTION 155<RET>
        /SSNAME ALL<RET>
        /RESTORE DSK:=DSKB:filename.RST<RET>
        "DONE
        /

   Examine the ersatz device names in the indirect command file and check
   them  against  existing  directories  to  ensure  that  you  will  not
   supersede necessary files.

   Then, execute the  indirect  command  file  by  typing  the  following
   commands:

        .R BACKUP<RET>
        /@filename.RST<RET>
        "DONE
        /



   7.4  USING SYSTEM FILES

   The SYS:  area includes several sample system files.  The monitor uses
   these  to  create  user  accounts  and  to initialize system programs.
   After you complete the procedures in Chapter 8 and 9  you  can  tailor
   these files to your installation.

         o  ACTDAE.SYS

            This is the system's accounting file.  It records  the  PPNs,
            passwords,  access information, and disk quotas for users and
            operators.  Without the ACTDAE.SYS file,  no  one  (users  or
            operators) can log in.

         o  SYSJOB.INI

            This file automatically starts system jobs.

         o  SYSTEM.CMD

            This file can be read by OPR to automatically start batch and
            spooling processes for GALAXY (refer to Chapter 10).

         o  TTY.INI

            INITIA reads this  file  and  initializes  the  CTY  and  TTY
            STOMPER functions.






                                    7-4











                                 CHAPTER 8

            RESTORING THE SUPPLEMENTARY PROCESSOR'S FILE SYSTEM



   The KL and KS processors are each supported by another processor.  The
   KL  processor uses a PDP-11 front end for I/O, which requires space on
   disk for its software.  The KS system uses an 8080 microprocessor that
   also  requires  disk  space for storage.  Sections 8.1 and 8.2 explain
   the procedure for restoring the front end file system for KL  systems.
   For  KS  systems, Section 8.2 explains the procedure for restoring the
   bootstrap program to disk.

   If you are upgrading a KL system, continue reading with  Section  8.1.
   If you are upgrading a KS system, go directly to Section 8.3.
|  
|  
|  
|  8.1  THE DISTRIBUTED KL FRONT END SOFTWARE
|  
|  For existing installations, where modifications have been made to  the
|  front  end software, you should copy the current front end file system
|  from FE.SYS[1,4] to a backup disk area to resolve those  modifications
|  with the new version of the front end.
|  
|  The  front  end  software  for  KL  systems  is  distributed  on   the
|  Monitor/ANF-10 tape.  Additional installation tools are distributed on
|  the CUSP tape.  You must restore these tapes to  disk,  following  the
|  procedures in Chapter 7, before beginning the installation.
|  
|  If you have used DSKB:[10,7] as the distribution  area  on  disk,  the
|  following Sub-File Directories (SFDs) will exist:
|  
|       DSKB:[10,7,RSX20F]  Contains the distributions of RSX20F for both
|                           DECtape  and  floppy  based systems.  It also
|                           contains RSXINS.MIC, the master  installation
|                           command file.  RSXINS.MIC is described below.
|  
|       DSKB:[10,7,FELOAD]  Contains FELOAD.BIN, a PDP-11  program  which
|                           will be placed in the boot blocks of the disk
|                           containing the front end file  system  during
|                           the installation process.


                                    8-1
|       DSKB:[10,7,F11]     Contains  F11,  a  tool  which  is  used   to
|                           manipulate  the  front  end file system.  The
|                           installation process will use F11  to  create
|                           and populate a new RSX20F file system.
|  
|  A  Monitor  Interpreted  Commands  (MIC)   file,   named   RSXINS.MIC,
|  distributed on DSKB:[10,7,RSX20F], performs all of the steps necessary
|  to create a new FE.SYS file.  It will:
|  
|        o  Ask a set of questions about the installation,  such  as  the
|           target  disk  for  the  installation,  where the distribution
|           files are stored, and whether or not the  console  front  end
|           should be reloaded.
|  
|        o  Use F11 to create and populate  a  new  FE.SYS  file  on  the
|           target disk.
|  
|        o  Use F11 to write the contents of  FELOAD.BIN  into  the  boot
|           blocks of the target disk.
|  
|        o  Run DTELDR to reload the front end  with  the  new  software.
|           This  is  done  if  you  answer  YES  to  Question  7  of the
|           installation  dialogue.    The   installation   dialogue   is
|           described in Section 8.2.1.
|  
|  
|  The next section describes the RSXINS installation process in detail.
|  
|  
|  
|  8.2  USING RSXINS
|  
|  Before running RSXINS, you must make sure of the following:
|  
|        o  Your system must be running MIC version 11 or later.
|  
|        o  The CUSP tape must  be  restored  so  that  its  subdirectory
|           organization  is  preserved.   This procedure is described in
|           Chapter 7.
|  
|        o  You must be logged in as [1,2].  The F11  program,  which  is
|           invoked  by  RSXINS,  uses  Super USETI/USETO calls to do its
|           work.  These can only be executed  by  a  job  logged  in  as
|           [1,2].
|  
|  
|  
|  
|  8.2.1  The RSXINS Dialogue
|  
|  A sample run  of  the  RSXINS  procedure  is  reproduced  below.   The
|  dialogue  questions are numbered for clarity in this text, but are not
|  numbered in the dialogue itself.  In the following example, RSXINS  is
|  used  to  install  a  new  front  end file on structure DSKE on a 1090
|  (DECtape-based) KL system.


                                    8-2
|  RSXINS is invoked by the command:
|  
|       .DO DSKB:RSXINS[10,7,RSX20F] <RET>
|  
|  It will display the following:
|  
|          RSXINS -- RSX-20F Front-End File System Installation Procedure
|  
|           Installation started at 16:29:17 on Tuesday, 08-Mar-88
|  
|       This procedure  will  create,  populate,  and  make  bootable  an
|       RSX-20F front end file system on any TOPS-10 structure.
|  
|       In the following dialogue, default answers  are  enclosed  within
|       square brackets.  If you would like further information about any
|       question, answer it with a question mark (?).   If  you  wish  to
|       return  to  the  previous question asked, answer with a less-than
|       sign (<).
|  
|  RSXINS checks to see if you are logged into [1,2].  If you are not, it
|  will abort execution.  Otherwise, it will begin a dialogue with you to
|  obtain all of the installation information needed.  In  the  dialogue,
|  each  question  provides  a default answer enclosed in square brackets
|  ([]).  To take the default answer, press the RETURN key.
|  
|  If you need help at any time with the answer to a particular question,
|  you can respond with a question mark (?).  RSXINS will then provide an
|  explanation of the question and  the  appropriate  type  of  reply  it
|  expects.  Then, it will repeat the question.
|  
|  If you wish to go back to the previous question that  was  asked,  you
|  can  type  a  less-than  sign  (<).   RSXINS  will repeat the previous
|  question, using your previous reply as the default.
|  
|  RSXINS will first ask for the name of the  target  disk  structure  or
|  unit:
|  
|    1 * Which disk structure do you wish to put the FE.SYS area on
|       [DSKB]?  DSKE <RET>
|  
|  Respond to this question with either the four-character name of a disk
|  structure  or  with  the  name of a specific disk unit (such as RPA0).
|  Use the physical unit name if you are  installing  FE.SYS  on  a  disk
|  which is part of a multiple-unit structure.
|  
|  Next you will specify the location of the RSX20F  distribution  files.
|  The area in which the executing RSXINS file is located is the default.
|  
|    2 * Where is the distribution area of the front-end files located
|       [default is DSKB:[10,7,RSX20F]]?  <RET>
|  
|  Specify the location of FELOAD, the new PDP-11 bootstrap program.  The
|  default  answer  will  be the FELOAD subdirectory on the same disk and
|  PPN where the executing RSXINS file is located.



                                    8-3
|    3 * Where is the distribution of FELOAD located [default
|       DSKB:[10,7,FELOAD]]?  <RET>
|  
|  Specify the  location  of  F11,  a  tool  used  by  the  procedure  to
|  manipulate   FE.SYS  files.   The  default  answer  will  be  the  F11
|  subdirectory on the same disk and PPN where the executing RSXINS  file
|  is located.
|  
|    4 * Where is the F11 program distribution area located [default
|       DSKB:[10,7,F11]]?  <RET>
|  
|  Your answer to the next question determines which  variant  of  RSX20F
|  will  be  installed  on  your  system.   The  valid responses for this
|  question are either F or D.   If  F  is  specified,  the  floppy-based
|  version  of  RSX20F  (VE##-##) will be installed; if a D is specified,
|  the DECtape-based version (VA##-##) will be installed.  The default is
|  D, indicating a DECtape-based system.
|  
|    5 * Is this for a Floppy (F) or DECtape (D) based system [D]?  <RET>
|  
|  RSXINS will then ask you how large you wish to make the  FE.SYS  file.
|  The  default  size  is  2000  blocks.   The  FE.SYS  file is allocated
|  contiguously on the disk.  If the new FE.SYS file is larger  than  the
|  previous  one,  or  if there is no previous file, the new file will be
|  created beginning at a place on the disk that is:
|  
|        o  On a block that is a multiple of 400 (decimal); and
|  
|        o  In an area where the disk space is available contiguously.
|  
|  If the requested number of blocks for FE.SYS is not available  with  a
|  beginning  position  on  a  multiple of 400 blocks, then the procedure
|  will fail.  In that case, it will be necessary to back  up  the  disk,
|  refresh it, run RSXINS to create the FE.SYS file, and then restore the
|  rest of the disk's files.
|  
|  In addition, if the FE.SYS file is created on a disk  which  has  user
|  files  on  it,  there  can  be a delay of up to 20 seconds between the
|  messages "[SY0:  redirected  to  DB0:]"  and  "[DB0:   mounted]"  when
|  RSX20F is reloaded.  This delay is caused by the search algorithm that
|  RSX20F performs when it is looking for the FE.SYS area.   It  examines
|  each block that is a multiple of 400 looking for a Files-11 HOM block.
|  If the FE.SYS file is nearer to the logical 'end' of the  disk  rather
|  than  the  'beginning',  the  search  can take up to 20 seconds.  This
|  behavior is normal.
|  
|    6 * How many blocks should the new FE.SYS file be [2000]?  <RET>
|  
|  RSXINS will then ask if the console front end is currently  using  the
|  target  structure.   If you accept the default answer YES, then RSXINS
|  will run DTELDR to reload the console FE using the  target  disk.   If
|  you answer NO, it will only perform the software installation.
|  
|    7 * Is the target structure currently in use by RSX-20F [Y]?  <RET>



                                    8-4
|  If you answered NO to this question, please skip to Question 9.
|  
|  If you answered YES, RSXINS will then display a cautionary message:
|  
|        ** Note ** It is important that the console FE  running  on
|       the  target  structure  (DSKE:)  not  access the FE.SYS area
|       during  the  course  of  the  installation,  otherwise   the
|       front-end  system  could  crash.   This  in  itself is not a
|       problem, because RSXINS will reload the  FE  after  the  new
|       file  system  is  built.   However,  if the KL10 CPU were to
|       crash during the installation procedure  before  the  update
|       process  was  completed,  then  the  front  end would not be
|       rebootable from the RP06 disk.  It  would  be  necessary  to
|       boot   the   front  end  from  console  media  (floppies  or
|       DECtapes), after which you could then reload the Monitor.
|  
|       While the likelihood of this happening is quite minimal,  it
|       is  possible.  There are steps that you can take to minimize
|       this risk further, such as:
|  
|  
|        *  Make sure that any unit-record devices connected to  the
|           front  end  (such  as line printers or card readers) are
|           idle during the update.  If they are  not  idle  and  an
|           error  occurs, RSX20F could potentially log the error to
|           disk and then invoke LOGXFR to transfer the log  to  the
|           KL.
|  
|        *  Avoid running this procedure if the time  is  within  15
|           minutes of midnight.  This prevents the possibility that
|           RSX20F will attempt to run the MIDNIT task.  If the time
|           is  close,  refrain from answering the next prompt until
|           it is 12:01 AM according to the system clock.
|  
|        *  Avoid running this procedure if the Monitor is  unstable
|           or  there  is  a high incidence of hardware failures.  A
|           system crash in the middle of the procedure would  leave
|           the  FE.SYS  file  in  a  partially-updated  state.  The
|           front-end would then have to be  reloaded  from  console
|           media.
|  
|  
|  After this text is displayed it will ask you if you wish  to  see  the
|  message again.  The default answer is NO; a YES will simply retype the
|  text.
|  
|  If you are running a single-processor KL system, please skip  down  to
|  Question  9.   If  you are running an SMP system, answer the following
|  question with the CPU number whose console  front  end  area  you  are
|  installing.   The default is for RSXINS to reload the front end on CPU
|  0.
|  
|    8 * Which CPU's console front-end do you wish to reload [0]?  <RET>
|  
|  All the parameters needed by RSXINS have now been entered.  A  summary


                                    8-5
|  of  the  selected  parameters  is  displayed  and you are asked if the
|  summary is correct:
|  
|       Here is a summary of the options you have selected for 
|       this installation.
|  
|       Target disk structure for installation:  DSKE
|       Location of RSX20F distribution area:    DSKB:[10,7,RSX20F]
|       Location of FELOAD distribution area:    DSKB:[10,7,FELOAD]
|       Location of F11 distribution area:       DSKB:[10,7,F11]
|       Installation type (D=DECtape, F=Floppy): D
|       Size of FE.SYS file to be created:       2000
|       Structure currently in use by RSX20F:    Y
|       Console front end to be reloaded on CPU: 0
|       FE.SYS currently exists on DSKE:         Y
|  
|       Please indicate if these choices are in error.  If you 
|       answer the following question with a NO, the entire RSXINS 
|       dialogue will be restarted.
|  
|    9 * Are the above correct (Y or N) [No default] ?  Y
|  
|  If you respond with N, then RSXINS will restart  the  dialogue.   Your
|  original responses will become the new defaults for each question.  If
|  you respond with Y, RSXINS will proceed to install the new  front  end
|  software.
|  
|  
|  
|  8.2.2  Installing the Front End File System
|  
|  RSXINS has asked  all  of  its  questions.   It  will  now  begin  the
|  installation process.  It will display the following message:
|  
|       All questions have been asked.  The  procedure  will  now  verify
|       that required SFDs and files exist.
|  
|  RSXINS will check to see if the FELOAD, F11, and RSX20F subdirectories
|  exist  in  the  places you have specified.  If it does not find one of
|  them, it will abort the installation.  If all files are  located,  you
|  will see the following message:
|  
|       All files have  been  located.   Commencing  actual  installation
|       procedure.
|  
|  Now it will check to see if an  FE.SYS  file  already  exists  on  the
|  target  structure/unit.  If an FE.SYS file does exist, RSXINS will run
|  F11 and delete the file from the target disk:
|  
|       Deleting existing DSKE:FE.SYS[1,4] file
|  
|       .run F11RUN:f11
|  
|       F11> dest DSKE:
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]


                                    8-6
|       Do you really want to DESTROY RPC0:, YES or NO? yes
|       [RPC0:FE.SYS[1,4] deleted, 2005. blocks freed]
|       F11> exit
|  
|  RSXINS will now create and populate a new FE.SYS file.  RSXINS will:
|  
|        o  Initialize the FE.SYS area, allocating the number  of  blocks
|           you requested in the dialogue.
|  
|        o  Create a [5,5] UIC directory in the file.
|  
|        o  Copy the file CORIMG.SYS, containing the  bootable  image  of
|           RSX20F,  to  the  [0,0]  directory, replacing the placeholder
|           file created when the area was initialized.
|  
|        o  Copy the rest of the RSX20F  files  to  the  [5,5]  directory
|           area.
|  
|        o  Copy FELOAD.BIN to the boot blocks (blocks 1 and 4 through 7)
|           of the disk unit.
|  
|  The output from RSXINS will look like this:
|  
|       Init front-end file, copy files to it, make structure bootable...
|  
|       MIC REVIVE
|  
|       .RUN F11RUN:F11
|  
|       F11> INI DSKE:/SIZE:2000
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]
|       [Created RPC0:FE.SYS[1,4], 2005. blocks allocated]
|       F11> UFD DSKE:[5,5]
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]
|       +-Directories created:
|       RPC0:[0,0]005005.DIR;1<164000=RWED,RWED,RWE,R>/ALLOCATE:1024.
|       F11> DEL DSKE:[0,0]CORIMG.SYS
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]
|       Files deleted:
|       RPC0:[0,0]CORIMG.SYS;1
|       100. blocks freed
|       F11> PUT DSKE:[0,0]/FILE:5=DSKB:[10,7,RSX20F,DECTAP]CORIMG.SYS
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]
|       +-RPC0:[0,0]CORIMG.SYS;1=DSKB:CORIMG.SYS[10,7,RSX20F,DECTAP]
|       F11> PUT DSKE:[5,5]=DSKB:[10,7,RSX20F,DECTAP].
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]
|  
|  F11 will output a line for each file it copies from  the  distribution
|  area  to  the  FE.SYS file.  A total of 42 files will be copied during
|  this step.
|  
|  RSXINS will next copy FELOAD.BIN from the  distribution  area  to  the
|  boot blocks of the disk:
|  
|       F11> BOOT DSKE:=DSKB:[10,7,FELOAD]FELOAD.BIN


                                    8-7
|       [DSKE will be treated as RPC0]
|       Loading 0  THRU 122
|       Loading 124  THRU 661
|       Loading 662  THRU 775
|       Loading 4000  THRU 4312
|       Loading 4314  THRU 4446
|       Loading 4450  THRU 5102
|       Loading 5104  THRU 5264
|       Loading 5266  THRU 5630
|       Loading 5632  THRU 6367
|       Loading 6370  THRU 6416
|       Loading 6420  THRU 7155
|       Loading 7156  THRU 7322
|       Loading 7324  THRU 7402
|       Loading 7404  THRU 7407
|  
|       Xfer address = 4106
|       Highest address loaded = 7407
|       F11> EXIT
|  
|  If you answered NO to Question 7, RSXINS will finish  at  this  point.
|  If  you  answered  YES,  RSXINS  will use DTELDR to reload the console
|  front end.
|  
|  
|  
|  8.2.3  Automatic Front End Reload
|  
|  RSXINS will run DTELDR to reload the console front end which is  using
|  the  target  disk.  If this is a single-processor KL system, this will
|  automatically be the front end 0 on CPU 0.  If this is an SMP  system,
|  the  console  front end on the CPU specified in response to Question 8
|  will be reloaded, completing the installation procedure for RSX20F:
|  
|       Reloading front-end 0...
|  
|  
|       .R DTELDR
|  
|       */RELOAD:00/SWITCH:000205/NODUMP
|       " front end 00 Loading from -11 disk.
|       " front end 00 initializing
|  
|       " front end 00 started
|       */EXIT
|  
|  
|       RSXINS procedure finished at 16:34:06 on Tuesday, 08-Mar-88
|  
|  
|  If you are installing  a  multiple-processor  KL  system,  repeat  the
|  procedures in Section 8.1-8.2 for each CPU.
|  
|  Section 8.3 describes the procedure for writing the bootstrap  program
|  to  disk  for  KS  systems.   If  you are installing or upgrading a KL


                                    8-8
|  system, go on to Chapter 9.
|  
|  
|  
|  8.3  WRITING THE KS BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM TO DISK
|  
|  It is not necessary to rebuild the KS microprocessor's file system for
|  an  upgrade  to  an existing system.  However, before you can boot the
|  monitor, you must write the bootstrap program to disk.
|  
|  To do this, run the SMFILE program as shown below.  You restored  this
|  program from the bootable tape in Chapter 7.  You must use the version
|  of SMFILE shipped with TOPS-10 Version 7.04 and you  must  supply  the
|  serial  number for your system's CPU.  Note that the following example
|  uses a CPU serial number of 4097.
|  
|       .RUN DEC:SMFILE<RET>
|  
|       DECSYSTEM 2020 DIAGNOSTICS FE-FILE PROGRAM
|       VERSION #.#, TOPS-10, KS10, CPU =4097
|       [FOR HELP TYPE "HELP"]
|  
|       SMFILE>WRITE SETUP DSKB:<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE RESET<RET>
|       SMFILE>READ DEC:T10KL.RAM<RET>
|       SMFILE>SERIAL 4097<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE CRAM<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE BOOT KSBOOT.EXE<RET>
|       SMFILE>WRITE DONE<RET>
|       SMFILE>EXIT<RET>
|  
        EXIT
        .

   The KS is now ready to run.  Reload the monitor  using  the  following
   commands:

        <CTRL/\>

        KS10>HA<RET>

   When the CPU is halted, press the RESET buttons on the CPU panel.

        KS10 CSL.V#.#
        BT AUTO
        BOOT V#(#)

        BOOT><RET>

        [Loading from DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE [1,4]]

   You can load the monitor by typing commands to the BOOT  program.   To
   load  the  default  monitor just press RETURN to the BOOT prompt.  The
   default file  name  is  DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4].   To  load  a  different
   monitor,  type the file name of the monitor to the BOOT prompt, taking


                                    8-9
   care  to  include  the  structure  name  and  the  complete  directory
   specification.

   The ONCE dialogue  begins  automatically.   The  startup  options  are
   described  in  Appendix  A.   For  a quick startup, use the GO startup
   option.



















































                                    8-10












           PART 4: BUILDING THE MONITOR AND TAILORING THE SYSTEM




             This  part  is  made  up  of  four  chapters  that
             describe  how to build your monitor and tailor the
             system to the particular needs of your site.   All
             system  installations  require  the  procedures in
             Part 4.











                                 CHAPTER 9

                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR



   Even though you have a running monitor, the bootstrap monitor is  only
   a  tool  for configuring a monitor for the system.  When you build the
   monitor, you configure support  for  the  peripheral  devices,  memory
   units,  terminal  and  network  lines, and supply information that the
   monitor needs to run CUSPs successfully.  You will build  the  monitor
   using  the  MONitor  GENerator  (MONGEN) program, assemble the monitor
   with MACRO, and load and save the monitor with LINK.   Then  you  will
   bring  up  your new monitor and create a bootable monitor tape.  Later
   sections describe how to automate the build  procedure  and  customize
   BOOT.

   This chapter describes the following steps to build the monitor:

        1.  Run MONGEN.

            Run MONGEN and answer the questions in the dialogue  section.
            MONGEN  creates  symbol  definition  source files, containing
            information  obtained  from  your  answers  to  the  dialogue
            questions.  You use the source files to build your monitor.

            MONGEN creates the following source files:
|  
|            o  SYSCNF.MAC  contains  the  symbol  definitions  for   the
|               hardware and software configuration.
|  
|            o  F.MAC contains feature test switches and their settings.
|  
|           If you change the setting of any of the feature test switches
|           in  the  FGEN  dialogue,  or  if  you  add  any  feature test
|           switches,  you  must  then  reassemble  the  bundled  monitor
|           modules  to  create  a  new monitor library file, TOPS10.REL.
|           This procedure is described in Appendix B.
|  
|       2.  Assemble the source modules.
|  
|           The COMMON, COMDEV, and COMMOD modules of the monitor must be
|           assembled  with the symbol definitions recorded in the MONGEN


                                    9-1
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|           configuration file, SYSCNF.MAC.

        3.  Link and load the monitor.

            The modules must be linked with  the  monitor  library  file,
            TOPS10.REL,  and with any unbundled software (such as FORTRAN
            and DECNET) that your installation has chosen to run.   These
            are combined to form a runnable, executable monitor in a file
            named SYSTEM.EXE.




   9.1  MONGEN

   MONGEN is a dialogue program that allows you to  choose  the  software
   modules  and  features that are most appropriate for your installation
   and to define your hardware and software configuration.  MONGEN builds
   MACRO-10  source  files.   The MONGEN-created source files contain the
   information needed to create an executable monitor that is specific to
   your  installation.   Parameters  that  are  assigned  in  these files
   determine how the monitor data base is assembled.

   Before running MONGEN, do the following:

        1.  Read this chapter  to  acquaint  yourself  with  the  current
            version of the MONGEN dialogue.

        2.  Be thoroughly familiar with your system configuration.

        3.  Predetermine the answers you will provide to the questions in
            the MONGEN dialogue.  Worksheets 1 and 2, provided in Chapter
            2, will help you determine your responses.

        4.  Obtain a copy of the product-specific installation guide  for
            each  unbundled  product  you  wish  to  use, and familiarize
            yourself with any modifications to the  following  procedures
            that  might  be  necessary for installing unbundled software.
            Special  installation  instructions  for  unbundled  software
            products   are  available  in  product-specific  installation
            guides.

   The MONGEN dialogue is  divided  into  the  following  sections,  each
   asking questions about a specific aspect of the system configuration:

|       SYSGEN    Defines the hardware and software configuration.   This
|                 includes   type   and   number   of   CPUs,   processor
|                 characteristics, ports for  data  communications,  tape
|                 and  disk  units,  line  printers, and other peripheral
|                 devices.  SYSGEN defines  the  terminal  configuration,
|                 including  the  OPR  line  number  and the dataset line
|                 numbers.  SYSGEN  also  offers  some  services  of  the


                                    9-2
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|                 monitor  that  you may refuse or accept.  SYSGEN is the
|                 longest portion of the MONGEN dialogue, and it  creates
|                 the SYSCNF.MAC file.

        FGEN      Allows you to  change  the  settings  of  feature  test
                  options,  thus  enabling  and  disabling  the  software
                  features and symbol values that  the  monitor  uses  to
                  determine  how  to  service  users  and  how to perform
                  maintenance operations.  FGEN creates the  F.MAC  file,
                  which  is required for building the monitor.  Note that
                  changing the default switch settings require  that  you
                  rebuild  all the monitor library files, thus creating a
                  monitor that is not supported  by  DIGITAL.   For  more
                  information, refer to Appendix B.
|  
|  If you are building the monitor for the first  time,  answer  all  the
|  questions  in  the SYSGEN dialogue first, then answer the questions in
|  the FGEN dialogue.  On subsequent occasions, select SYSGEN if you want
|  to  make changes to your harware or software configuration, and select
|  FGEN if you want to change any feature test switch settings or add any
|  new feature test switches.



   9.1.1  Running MONGEN

   You can run MONGEN from any disk area, and the source files  that  are
   generated  are  stored  in  your  job's default disk area (DSK) or any
   other disk area you specify.  Make sure that the disk area  where  the
   monitor  is to be built has at least 7000 free disk blocks.  Clear the
   directory area of any extraneous files to eliminate the possibility of
   confusion when assembling the monitor.
|  
|  MONGEN has three modes  of  dialogue  (SHORT,  PROMPT,  and  LONG)  to
|  service  users  of  different  levels  of  experience.  Throughout the
|  dialogue, MONGEN questions take the  form  of  the  mode  you  choose.
|  MONGEN questions are in the form:
|  
|       question (default,possible answers) [explanation]:
|  
|  An explanation of the three modes and the form the questions  take  in
|  each mode, is provided below:
|  
|       Mode           Effect
|  
|       SHORT          MONGEN prints only the questions on your terminal.
|                      This  mode  assumes  that  you  need no listing of
|                      default or possible answers, and no explanation of
|                      the   question.    MONGEN  assumes  that  you  are
|                      familiar with the choice of answers.   SHORT  mode
|                      is recommended only for experienced users.



                                    9-3
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|       PROMPT         MONGEN  prints  each  question,   but   adds   (in
|                      parentheses)  a  choice  of  answers.  The default
|                      value,  if  any,   is   printed   first   in   the
|                      parenthesis, followed by the other answers you may
|                      type, separated by commas.  Due to the  nature  of
|                      some of the questions, a default answer may not be
|                      offered.  This is the default mode and it is  used
|                      in this section to illustrate the dialogue.
|  
|       LONG           MONGEN prints each question, the choice of answers
|                      (in  parentheses),  and adds an explanation of the
|                      question  [in  square  brackets].   LONG  mode  is
|                      strongly  recommended  for all first-time users of
|                      this version of MONGEN.
|  
|  Each question, regardless of the mode chosen, ends with a  colon.   If
|  you  choose  PROMPT or LONG mode, select your answer from the possible
|  answers listed within parentheses and enter it after  the  colon.   To
|  accept  the default answer, just press RETURN.  If the question has no
|  default, MONGEN prints an error message and repeats the question.  The
|  possible answers are listed in one of these forms:
|  
|       (d,m-n)        A range of numbers is provided, where 'd'  is  the
|                      default  value, 'm' is the smallest number and 'n'
|                      the largest number you may type.  Choose a  number
|                      in   that   range.   Numbers  are  decimal  unless
|                      specified otherwise in the question.
|  
|       (m-n)          A range of numbers with no default value provided.
|                      You  can  specify  multiple,  consecutive terminal
|                      lines by answering with a range of numbers in  the
|                      form (m-n).
|  
|       (YES,NO)       Answer with YES or NO
|  
|       (a,b,c,...,z)  Choose one of the values in the list.
|  
|  If you type an invalid or inappropriate  response,  MONGEN  prints  an
|  error  message  and  repeats  the  question.   You  may respond to the
|  question again.
|  
|  To execute the version of MONGEN in  DSK:[10,7],  type  the  following
|  command:
|  
|       .R SETSRC<RET>
|  
|       *CP [10,7,MON]<RET>

        *<CTRL/C>

        .RUN MONGEN<RET>



                                    9-4
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


   MONGEN responds with:
|  
|       Write MONGEN.MIC (YES,NO):
|  
|  After you answer this question, MONGEN begins:
|  
|       MONGEN for 704 monitors
|       MONGEN will generate any known TOPS-10 configuration.  For
|       information about which configurations are supported, please
|       refer to the SPD.
|       /HELP (PROMPT,SHORT,LONG):
|  
|  Since PROMPT is the default mode, MONGEN provides a list  of  possible
|  answers  in  parentheses.   If you now type /HELP, MONGEN provides the
|  LONG version of this question:
|  
|       MONGEN for 704 monitors.
|       MONGEN will generate any known TOPS-10 configuration.  For
|       information about which configurations are supported, please
|       refer to the SPD.
|       /HELP (PROMPT, SHORT, LONG)[
|       All numbers are decimal unless stated otherwise
|       Unique abbreviations are allowed everywhere to all questions
|       /HELP reasks a question in the next longer mode
|       /HELP:xxx sets the mode permanently.  Modes are:
|       SHORT is short
|       PROMPT has choices in ()
|       LONG has choices in () and an explanation in []]:
|  
|  As shown above, you may ask MONGEN for the next longer version of  the
|  current question by typing /HELP.  If you wish to change modes for the
|  remaining questions, you only need to type  /HELP:mode,  where  'mode'
|  can  be  SHORT,  PROMPT, or LONG.  For example, if you choose SHORT or
|  PROMPT mode and later want to change to LONG mode  for  the  remaining
|  questions,  append  the  argument LONG to the switch /HELP, separating
|  the two with a colon.  For example, typing
|  
|       /HELP:LONG
|  
|  will set the mode to LONG for the remainder of the dialogue.
|  
|  To exit from MONGEN at any time, type <CTRL/Z>.



   9.1.2  The MONGEN Dialogue Questions

   This section lists the dialogue questions for each part of MONGEN.   A
   number  precedes  each  MONGEN  question.   These  numbers help you to
   follow the dialogue more easily.  They are not actually displayed when
   you run MONGEN.



                                    9-5
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


                                    NOTE

           MONGEN asks some questions only for specific types  of
           systems;   and  asks  others  only  if  you  answer  a
           preceding question in a certain way.

   Before running  MONGEN,  read  this  chapter  carefully.   Decide  the
   answers  for  each  question  in the dialogue.  Worksheets 1 and 2 are
   provided in Chapter 2 to help you record your responses to the  MONGEN
   questions.   If  you  like, you can create a batch control file to run
   MONGEN, and answer the questions in the control  file  to  save  time.
   The MONGEN control file is described in Section 9.5.

   This section lists the MONGEN questions in PROMPT mode, which  is  the
   default  mode.   Use  LONG  mode or type /HELP after a question to get
   more information about each question.
|  
|    1     Which GEN (SYS,F):
|  
|  Respond with SYS or F to indicate the section that you  wish  to  run.
|  If you respond with SYS, MONGEN prints the SYSGEN questions.  When the
|  SYSGEN dialogue is done, MONGEN asks Question 1 again, so that you can
|  start  the FGEN part of the MONGEN dialogue.  The SYSGEN questions are
|  listed in Section 9.1.2.1.  The FGEN questions are listed  in  Section
|  9.1.2.2.
|  
|  
|  
|  9.1.2.1  Running SYSGEN -
|  
|  SYSGEN asks questions about the hardware and software of your  system.
|  This  includes  the  central  processor(s), storage devices, and other
|  peripheral devices.
|  
|    2     Output (DSK:SYSCNF.MAC):
|  
|    3     DECsystem10 (KL,KS):
|  
|  Question 4 is asked for KL systems only.
|  
|    4     CPUs (1,1-6):
|  
|    5     System name:
|  
|  Question 6 is asked for each CPU.
|  
|    6     CPUn serial # (1-10000):
|  
|    7     Exclude monitor overhead from user run time (YES,NO):
|  
|  Questions 8 and 9 are asked for KL systems only.  Question 9 is  asked
|  only if you answer Question 8 with YES.


                                    9-6
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    8     EBOX/MBOX runtime accounting (YES,NO):
|  
|    9     Exclude PI time from user runtime (YES,NO):
|  
|    10    Account verification (YES,NO):
|  
|  Questions 11 and 12 are asked for KL systems only.
|  
|    11    MOS memory (YES,NO):
|  
|  If you answer NO to Question 12, Question 20 will not be asked.
|  
|          Autoconfigured device options:
|    12      Include SCA (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|  If you answer Questions 12 through 16, 20, 21, 26, and 31  through  39
|  with PROMPT, you will be asked the following questions:
|  
|            Device code (CR,0-774):
|            Drive, slave, or unit:
|            Data:
|            Do you want to specify more data (NO,YES):
|  
|  If you answer NO to Question 13, Question 108 will not be asked.
|  
|    13      Include Ethernet service (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|  If you answer Question 14 with NO, Questions 21 and  31  will  not  be
|  asked.
|  
|    14      Include SA10 device support (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|  Questions 15 through 17 are asked for KL systems only.
|  
|    15      Include RP01/2/3 disks (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    16      Include Swapping drums (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|  If you answer Questions 17, 19, 22, and 27 through 30 with PROMPT, and
|  Question 18 with YES, you will be asked the following questions:
|  
|            Device code (CR,0-774):
|            Massbus device (0,0-7):
|            Drive, slave, or unit:
|            Data:
|            Do you want to specify more data (YES,NO):
|  
|    17      Include RS04/5 Massbus disks (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    18      Prompt for RP0x/RM0x Massbus disks (NO,YES):
|  
|  Questions 19 through 21 are asked for KL systems only.


                                    9-7
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    19      Include DX20/RP20 disks (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    20      Include CI20/HSC disks (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    21      Include SA10/IBM disks (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    22      Include TM02/TM03 magtapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|  Questions 23 through 25 are asked for KS systems only.
|  
|    23      Include UNIBUS/LP20 printers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    24      Include UNIBUS/CD20 card readers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|          Local Terminal Configuration:
|    25      DZ-11 TTY lines (0-32):
|  
|  Questions 26 through 53 are asked for KL systems only.
|  
|    26      Include DX10/TX01/TX02 tapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    27      Include DX20/TX02 tapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    28      Include TM78/TU78/TU79 magtapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    29      Include TM10B magtapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    30      Include TC10C magtapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    31      Include SA10/IBM tapes (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    32      Include BA10/LP100 printers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    33      Include CFE/LP20 printers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    34      Include XY10 plotters (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    35      Include CR10 card readers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    36      Include CFE/CD20 card readers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    37      Include CP10/CP10D card punches (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    38      Include PC09 paper tape punches (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|    39      Include PC09 paper tape readers (NO,YES,PROMPT):
|  
|          Types of DTE service to load:
|    40      Load ANF-10 DTE service (YES,NO):
|  
|    41      Load IBMCOMM DTE service (YES,NO):



                                    9-8
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    42      Load DECnet DTE service (YES,NO):
|  
|  If you answer YES to Question 43, MONGEN asks Questions 44 through 53.
|  If  you  answer  NO,  MONGEN  asks  Question  44  and goes directly to
|  Question 54.
|  
|          Local terminal configuration:
|    43      Configure old terminal scanners (NO,YES):
|  
|  Question 44 is asked for each CPU.
|  
|    44      How many RSX-20F TTYs on CPUn (0,0-128):
|  
|    45      How many DC10s on CPUn (1,0-2):
|  
|    46      How many DC68s on CPUn (1,0-2):
|  
|    47      How many DC76s on CPUn (1,0-2):
|  
|  Questions 48 through 50 are asked for each DC10.
|  
|            For DC10 n:
|    48        # DC10B 8 line data groups (1-8):
|  
|  If Question 49 is answered with 0, Question 50 is not asked.
|  
|    49    # DC10E Data set control groups (0-1):
|  
|    50    Correspondance of DC10E lines to the DC10B lines (M-N,P):
|  
|  Question 51 is asked for each DC68.
|  
|            For DC68 n:
|    51        # Octal lines on DC68, including its console TTY (1-144):
|  
|  Questions 52 and 53 are asked for each DC76.
|  
|            For DC76 n:
|    52        Which DL10 port is the DC76 connected to (0,1-7):
|  
|    53      Decimal lines on DC76 (1-129):
|  
|    54      OPR octal line  (CTY,0-3):
|  
|    55      Data set lines
|  
|    56    Number of Jobs (1-511):
|  
|    57    Maximum pages of core for each job (0,0-16384):
|  
|    58    Total amount of system core in K (512-4096):



                                    9-9
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|  Question 59 is asked for KS systems only.
|  
|    59    Clock ticks per second (60,50):
|  
|  Question 60 is asked for KL systems only.  If you answer  Question  60
|  with  0, MONGEN asks Question 61.  Otherwise, MONGEN skips to Question
|  62.
|  
|    60    Number of real-time devices (0,0-77):
|  
|    61    Allow jobs to be locked in core (YES,NO):
|  
|    62    Guaranteed number of pages for unlocked jobs (0,0-16384):
|  
|    63    Number of pages reserved for locking jobs in Exec Virtual
|          Memory (10,0-?):
|  
|    64    Number of high priority queues (0,0-15):
|  
|    65    Meter (NO,YES):
|  
|    66    KASER (NO,YES):
|  
|    67    MPXSER (YES,NO):
|  
|    68    PSISER (YES,NO):
|  
|    69    IPCF (YES,NO):
|  
|    70    ENQ/DEQ (YES,NO):
|  
|    71    Disk sets (ALL):
|  
|  If you are building a KL monitor and you answer Question 72 with  YES,
|  MONGEN  asks  Questions  73  through  86.   Otherwise, MONGEN skips to
|  Question 97.
|  
|  If you are building a KS monitor and you answer Question 72 with  YES,
|  MONGEN  asks  Questions  87  through  96.   Otherwise, MONGEN skips to
|  Question 97.
|  
|    72    Configure non-autoconfigured hardware (NO,YES):
|  
|  For KL systems only, Questions 73 through 86:
|  
|          on CPUn:
|    73    DIS (NO,YES):
|  
|    74    Type (VP10,340,VB10C):
|  
|    75    # TD10S (0,0-2):



                                    9-10
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    76      # Units on DTn (1-8):
|  
|    77    # of DA28s (0,0-4):
|  
|    78    # of lines for TTY pool (8,0-512):
|  
|    79    # of DAS78s (0,0-8):
|  
|          For DAS78 n:
|    80    Which DL10 port is the DAS78 connected to (0,0-7):
|  
|    81    Decimal lines on the DAS78 (1-16):
|  
|    82    # DN60s (0,0-7):
|  
|          For DN60 n:
|    83    Which port is the DN60 connected to (0,0-7):
|  
|    84    Decimal lines on the DN60 (1-12):
|  
|    85    How many DC75NPs or DN87s on CPUn (0,0-8):
|  
|          For front end number 1:
|    86    To which DL10 port is the DC75 or DN87 connected (0,0-7):
|  
|  For KS systems only, Questions 87 through 96:
|  
|    87    # RX211s (0,0-2):
|  
|    88      # Units on RXx (1-2):
|  
|    89    # KMC/DUP Lines (0,0-2):
|  
|    90    Type of line for KDPn (ANF10,DECNET,USER,IBM):
|  
|    91    # DMR11 Lines (0,0-8):
|  
|    92    DMRn line type (ANF10,DECNET,USER,IBM):
|  
|    93    DMRn switched line (YES,NO):
|  
|    94    DMRn half duplex (YES,NO):
|  
|    95    Is DMRn secondary (YES,NO):
|  
|    96    Load IBM communications software (YES,NO):
|  
|    97    Number of PTYs (20,1-505):
|  
|  If you answer Question 98 with YES, MONGEN asks Questions 99 and  100.
|  If you answer NO, MONGEN skips to Question 126.



                                    9-11
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    98    Network software (YES,NO):
|  
|    99    Node name:
|  
|    100   Number of remote TTYs (485,0-485):
|  
|  If you answer YES to Question 101, MONGEN asks Questions  102  through
|  114.  If you answer NO, MONGEN skips to Question 115.
|  
|    101   ANF-10 software (YES,NO):
|  
|    102     Node name (node):
|  
|    103     Node number of central site (1,1-77):
|  
|    104     Remote terminals (YES,NO):
|  
|    105     Virtual terminals (YES,NO):
|  
|    106     Remote card readers (YES,NO):
|  
|    107     Remote line printers (YES,NO):
|  
|    108     Remote paper tape punches (NO,YES):
|  
|    109     Remote paper tape readers (NO,YES):
|  
|    110     Remote plotters (NO,YES):
|  
|    111     Remote DN8x DDCMP devices (YES,NO):
|  
|    112     Remote data entry terminals (YES,NO):
|  
|    113     Remote task-to-task (YES,NO):
|  
|    114     Number of connects (256,1-512):
|  
|  If you answer YES to Question 115, MONGEN asks Questions  116  through
|  121.  If you answer NO, MONGEN skips to Question 122.
|  
|    115   DECnet software (YES,NO):
|  
|    116     Node name (node):
|  
|    117     Area number of central site (1,1-63):
|  
|    118     Node number of central site (1,1-1023):
|  
|    119     Router type (ROUTING,NONROUTING):
|  
|    120     Transmit password (DECNET20):



                                    9-12
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    121     Remote terminals (YES,NO):
|  
|  Question 122 is asked only if you answered Question  13  and  91  with
|  YES.   If  you answer Question 122 with YES, MONGEN asks Questions 123
|  through 125.  If youu answer 122 with NO,  MONGEN  skips  to  Question
|  126.
|  
|    122     LAT software (YES,NO):
|  
|    123     Node name (node):
|  
|    124     Number of circuits (20,1-100):
|  
|    125     Service groups:
|  
|    126   Decimal "symbol,value":
|  
|    127   Octal "symbol,value":
|  
|    128   SIXBIT "symbol,value":
|  
|    129   Type "device-mnemonic,PI-channel" for special devices:
|  
|    130   Type "device-mnemonic,PI-channel,no.-of-devices":
|  
|    131   Type "device-mnemonic,PI-channel,highest-ac-to-save":
|  
|    132   Type "ersatz-device,P,Pn,search-list-type":
|  
|    133   Type "command-name,dispatch,flags,unique-bits,PRVTAB-name":
|  
|  If you enter a terminal class in Question 134, MONGEN  asks  Questions
|  135 through 144.  Otherwise, MONGEN skips to Question 148.
|  
|    134   Terminal class:
|  
|    135   Width (80,17-255):
|  
|    136   Length (0,0-255):
|  
|    137   Fill (0,0-3):
|  
|    138   Characteristics:
|  
|    139   Address of erase table (V100EP):
|  
|    140   Address of rubout table (VTXXBP):
|  
|    141   ANSI conformance level (1,0-15):
|  
|    142   DEC conformance level (0,0-15):



                                    9-13
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|    143   Characteristic attributes:
|  
|  If you do not enter a member terminal type  in  Question  144,  MONGEN
|  repeats  Question  134.   If  you enter a member terminal type, MONGEN
|  first asks Questions 145 and 146, then repeats Question 134.
|  
|          Now enter member terminal types
|    144     Terminal type:
|  
|    145     Additional attributes to set:
|  
|    146     Attributes to clear:
|  
|  If a class to extend is entered in Question 147, Questions 144 through
|  146  are  repeated.   If  no  class  to extend is entered, MONGEN asks
|  Question 148.
|  
|          Additional terminals for classes:
|    147   Class to extend:
|  
|    148   System default terminal type (TTY):
|  
|  This is the  last  question  in  the  SYSGEN  portion  of  the  MONGEN
|  dialogue.  MONGEN responds with:
|  
|       File DSK:SYSCNF.MAC Closed [SYSGEN finished]
|  
|  The SYSGEN dialogue is finished when the source  file  is  written  to
|  disk.   Question  1 is repeated so that you may start the FGEN portion
|  of the dialogue.  If you wish to exit from MONGEN, type <CTRL/Z>.
|  
|  
|  
|  9.1.2.2  Running FGEN -
|  
|  The FGEN dialogue simplifies the task of choosing appropriate software
|  from  a  wide  selection.   For  example,  FGEN  allows  you to select
|  non-standard  TOPS-10  features  for  a  given  application.   In  the
|  dialogue, the software options are called "feature-test switches."
|  
|  
|                                   NOTE
|  
|          Only  the  standard  settings  of   the   feature-test
|          switches  have  been  tested  and are fully supported.
|          Although  installations  may  alter  the  settings  of
|          feature-test options, nonstandard option settings have
|          not been tested and are not supported.
|  
   If you change the settings of the feature-test switches, you must then
   rebuild  the  monitor  library  file,  TOPS10.REL.   This procedure is
   documented in Appendix B.


                                    9-14
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


   After you select the FGEN portion of the dialogue, you may:

         o  List the feature-test switches with their standard settings.

         o  Request an explanation of the feature-test switch symbols.

         o  Change the feature-test switch settings.

         o  Add new feature-test switches.


   The FGEN questions are listed below.

     1     Which GEN (SYS,F):

     2     Output (DSK:F.MAC):
|  
|    3     Feature set (KL10,KS10):
|  
|  If you select the standard settings by answering Question 4 with  YES,
|  the FGEN portion of the dialogue is finished.
|  
|  If you answer Question 4 with NO, MONGEN prompts you with Question 5.
|  
|    4     Standard settings (YES,NO):
|  
|  To list a standard switch and its setting, type the name of the switch
|  and press RETURN.  For example:
|  
|          Feature:KL10<RET>
|          Hardware options
|             FTKL10==:-1 ;KL10 support
|  
|  To list all standard switches and their settings, type ALL  and  press
|  RETURN.   All  standard  switches and settings will be listed, grouped
|  according   to   the   following   categories:    hardware    options,
|  communications and network features, I/O features, scheduler features,
|  UUO features, miscellaneous features, and customer defined features.
|  
|  To change the value of a known switch, or  to  create  a  new  switch,
|  enter  the  name of the switch without the FT prefix, its value, and a
|  comment if desired, separated by commas and press RETURN.
|  
|    5     Feature:
|  
|  This is the last question in the FGEN portion of the MONGEN  dialogue.
|  MONGEN responds with:
|  
|       File DSK:F.MAC Closed
|  
   Question 1 is asked again.  You may choose SYSGEN  or  FGEN,  or  type
   <CTRL/Z> to exit from MONGEN.


                                    9-15
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


   9.2  ASSEMBLING THE MONITOR

   You must always assemble the following monitor source files:

        COMMON.MAC
        COMDEV.MAC
        COMMOD.MAC
|  
|  With the configuration source file:
|  
|       SYSCNF.MAC
|  
   It is necessary to assemble the following universal files with them:

        F.MAC
        S.MAC
|       NETPRM.MAC
|       DTEPRM.MAC (KL only)
|       DEVPRM.MAC
|       D36PAR.MAC
|  
   It is important that F.MAC precede S.MAC  in  the  compiler  commands,
   because  S.MAC  has conditional assemblies that depend on the contents
   of F.MAC.  Use the following monitor commands to compile the monitor:

        .COMPILE/COMPILE F,S<RET>
        MACRO:   F
        MACRO:   S

        EXIT

|       .COMPILE/COMPILE DEVPRM,DTEPRM,NETPRM,D36PAR<RET>
|       MACRO:   DEVPRM
|       MACRO:   DTEPRM
|       MACRO:   NETPRM
|       MACRO:   D36PAR
|  
|       EXIT
|  
|       .COMPILE/COMPILE SYSCNF+<COMMON,COMDEV,COMMOD><RET>
|       MACRO:   COMMON
|       MACRO:   COMDEV
|       MACRO:   COMMOD
|  
|       EXIT

   If you  are  using  a  standard  combination  of  feature-test  switch
   settings and DIGITAL-supplied sources, you do not need to assemble the
   remainder of the bundled monitor modules.  These modules have  already
   been   assembled   and  combined  in  a  monitor  library  file  named
|  TOPS10.REL.  TOPS10.REL must be located in the same disk area as  that
|  which you are using to build the monitor, before you can link and save


                                    9-16
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|  the monitor.
|  
|  For new KL installations, the TOPS10.REL library is in  [10,7,MON,KL].
|  For   new   KS  installations,  the  TOPS10.REL  library  file  is  in
|  [10,7,MON,KS].

   If you are not using a standard  combination  of  feature-test  switch
   settings  or if you have made changes to the monitor sources, you must
   assemble all the monitor sources, creating a new monitor library file.
   These procedures are explained in Appendix B.



   9.3  LINKING AND SAVING THE MONITOR

   The next step in building the monitor is to link the monitor  modules.
   The  LINK  program  used in the procedures that follow provides both a
   runnable monitor (SYSTEM.EXE), and several options for information you
   can  receive  about  the linking process.  This section lists only the
   commands that the LINK program requires to  build  the  monitor.   For
   full  documentation  on  the  LINK  program, refer to the TOPS-10 Link
   Reference Manual.

   The following sequence of instructions loads and saves a monitor for a
   standard KL configuration with no unbundled software:

|       .R LINK<RET>
|       *SYSTEM/SAVE/NOINITIAL/HASH:13K = /LOCALS-<CR>
|       #COMMON.REL,COMDEV.REL,COMMOD.REL,TOPS10.REL-<CR>
|       #/PATCH:200/SEARCH/COUNTERS/GO<CR>
|  
        EXIT

        .

   The file name SYSTEM is an arbitrary name chosen for the monitor;  you
   can  use  any  file  name.  However, the bootstrap program defaults to
   SYSTEM.EXE[1,4], so SYSTEM is a good choice for the file name.

   To load unbundled software with the monitor, include the name  of  the
   relocatable file(s) in the command line after COMMOD.  For SMP support
   use CPNSER.REL.



   9.3.1  Copying the New Monitor to SYS:

   Now copy your customized monitor to SYS  so  that  it  can  be  easily
   loaded  by  the  bootstrap program.  To copy your monitor to SYS, type
   the following monitor command:

        .COPY SYS:=SYSTEM.EXE<RET>


                                    9-17
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


   After SYSTEM.EXE is in SYS, you can start your new monitor.



   9.4  BRINGING UP THE NEW MONITOR

   Before you can load the new monitor, you must reload the  system.   To
   do  this,  you  will  shut  down  the current monitor, then reload the
   monitor.  Use the GO startup  option  to  start  the  monitor  quickly
   without  changing  disk  parameters.   The following procedures show a
   quick startup  for  a  KL  and  then  for  a  KS.   On  both  systems,
   SYS:TTY.INI and SYS:SYSJOB.INI were created previously.

   Procedure for KL Systems

        <CTRL/\>
        PAR>SHUTDOWN<RET>
        DECSYSTEM-10 NOT RUNNING
        [Dumping on DSKB:CRASH.EXE[1,4]]
        [Loading from DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]]

        MONITOR mm-dd-yy
        Why reload:NEW<RET>
        Date:NOV-29-87<RET>
        Time:18:36:12<RET>
        Startup option: GO<RET>

        MONITOR 18:36:41 CTY system 2476
        Connected to Node CENTRA(0) Line #45

        .LOGIN 1,2<RET>

        .R OPR<RET>
        OPR>EXIT<RET>

        .

   Procedure for KS Systems

        <CTRL/\>

        KS10>HA<RET>

   (Press the RESET and BOOT switches on the console at the same time.)

        KS10 CSL.V#.#
        BTAUTO
        BOOT V#(##)

        BOOT><RET>

        MONITOR mm-dd-yy


                                    9-18
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


        Why reload:NEW<RET>
        Date:NOV-29-87<RET>
        Time:18:36:06<RET>

        Startup option: GO<RET>

        MONITOR 18:36:20 CTY system 4101
        .LOGIN 1,2<RET>
        .R OPR<RET>
        OPR>EXIT<RET>

        .

|  Next, you will create a bootable magnetic tape for your system.
|  
|  
|  
|  9.5  CREATING THE SYSTEM BOOTABLE TAPE
|  
|  This section describes the procedure for creating a bootable  magnetic
|  tape  for  your system.  The bootable tape is used to get your monitor
|  running in the event of a disk  failure  that  prevents  booting  from
|  disk.   You should rebuild the bootable tape every time you load a new
|  monitor.
|  
|  For KL systems, you can build the bootable tape using the instructions
|  in  Section  9.5.1.   For  KS  systems, refer to Section 9.5.2.  These
   procedures save the monitor as DSKB:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4].
|  
|  
|  
|  9.5.1  Creating the KL System Bootable Tape
|  
|  Use the following steps to create a bootable monitor  tape  for  a  KL
|  system.   Mount  a  magnetic  tape  that you will use for the bootable
|  tape, ensuring that the write ring is on the tape.  Tape drive MTA0 is
   used here.

        .ASSIGN MTA0: BACKUP:<RET>

        .SET BLOCKSIZE BACKUP:512<RET>

        .REWIND BACKUP:<RET>

        .COPY BACKUP:=FEFILE.EXE<RET>

        .COPY BACKUP:=SYS:BACKUP.EXE<RET>

   Then, copy your new monitor and  all  the  system  files  to  tape  by
   typing:

        .R BACKUP<RET>


                                    9-19
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


        /SAVE DSKB:[1,4]=SYS:SYSTEM.EXE<RET>

|       /SAVE DSKB:[1,4]=SYS:*.*,REL:*.*,UNV:*.*<RET>
|  
|  
|  
|  9.5.2  Creating the KS System Bootable Tape
|  
|  Use the following steps to create a bootable monitor  tape  for  a  KS
|  system.   Mount  a  tape  that  you  will  use  for the bootable tape,
|  ensuring that a write ring is included.  Tape drive MTA0 is used here.

        .ASSIGN MTA0: BACKUP:<RET>

        .SET BLOCKSIZE BACKUP:512<RET>

        .REWIND BACKUP:<RET>

|       .COPY BACKUP:=T10KL.RAM<RET>
|  
|       .COPY BACKUP:=BOOT.RDI<RET>
|  
        .COPY BACKUP:=SYS:BACKUP.EXE<RET>

   Then, copy your new monitor and  all  the  system  files  to  tape  by
   typing:

        .R BACKUP<RET>

        /SAVE DSKB:[1,4]=SYS:SYSTEM.EXE<RET>

|       /SAVE DSKB:[1,4]=SYS:*.*, REL:*.*, UNV:*.*<RET>



   9.6  AUTOMATING THE BUILD PROCEDURE

   This section describes how to automate the build procedure.  After you
   build  the  monitor  through  direct  interaction,  you  can  edit the
   distributed build files to tailor them to the characteristics of  your
   installation.   This  section describes the files necessary to build a
   monitor, tells you where they are located and how  to  customize  them
   and use them.

   You can use the automated build procedure whenever the monitor must be
   rebuilt  (to  install patches, upgrade the monitor version, or to make
   changes to the configuration of the hardware and/or  software).   When
   you  need  to make changes to your monitor that require rebuilding it,
   follow the instructions in this chapter.

   Before you submit the control files described in this  section,  start
   the GALAXY batch and spooling system as described in Chapter 10.


                                    9-20
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


   The following table lists each file and its function.  An asterisk (*)
   appears  next  to  files that require customization.  The next section
   explains how to modify these files.

   Some of the files pertain only to  particular  installations.   Except
|  where noted, all of the files below are on the Monitor/ANF-10 tape.


   Table 9-1:  Monitor Build Files


     File              Function
|  
|    BUILD.CTL         compiles the files in the  build  areas.   These
|                      areas   include   the  COMMON  modules  (COMMON,
|                      COMDEV, and  COMMON).   In  addition,  BUILD.CTL
|                      builds TOPS10.GLB and MON.EXE.
|  
   * BUILDS.DCL        contains command definitions.

   * BUILDS.MIC        submits all the build control files.

   * BUILDS.PTH        defines the build areas.

     COMCTL.MIC        provides a template for the  control  file  that
                       COMPIL.MIC uses.

     COMCTL.TEC        reads COMCTL.MIC to generate  the  control  file
                       that COMPIL.MIC uses.

     COMPIL.CTL        builds TOPS10.REL.

     COMPIL.MIC        creates and submits a control file that compiles
                       and lists a single monitor module.

   * GEN.CTL           runs the MONGEN dialogues.

     MPE.FIL           contains a list of MPE files to compile and  the
                       names of the directory areas for the .REL files.
                       This file applies only to SMP sites.  It  is  on
                       the MPE or CPNSER tape.

     START.CTL         performs the following operations in preparation
                       for full recompilation of the monitor:

                        o  Deletes all files from BASE:   except  *.MAC
                           and *.MIC.

                        o  Creates the LINK.CCL and GLOB.MIC files.

                        o  Creates MPE.FIL, UNSUP.FIL,  and  DECNET.FIL
                           if  they  do  not already exist in the build


                                    9-21
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


                           area.

                        o  Uses the *.FIL  files  to  create  UNIV.CMD,
                           TOPS10.CMD,  and  TOPS10.CCL  in  each  FGEN
                           area.

                        o  Invokes TREE.TEC, and TOPS10.TEC.
|  
|                                            NOTE
|  
|                          Submit START.CTL whenever you install  a
|                          new version of the monitor, an autopatch
|                          update  to  the  monitor,  or  when  you
|                          change   the  value  of  any  previously
|                          defined  feature  test  symbols  from  a
|                          universal file.
|  
   * SWITCH.INI        includes switches,  runs  the  version  of  PATH
                       shipped  with  TOPS-10  Version  7.04,  and sets
                       defaults for the SUBMIT commands.

   * TOPS10.FIL        contains a list of  files  to  compile  and  the
                       names of the directory areas for the .REL files.

     TOPS10.TEC        creates the .CCL and .CMD files that COMPIL.CTL,
                       BUILD.CTL, and UNIV.CTL use.

     TREE.TEC          uses BUILDS.PTH and  START.MIC  to  insure  that
                       FGEN  and  BUILD  areas  exist and that they are
                       empty.   TREE.TEC  deletes  START.MIC  when   it
                       completes this action.

   * UNIV.CTL          recompiles all the universal files  in  selected
                       areas, as defined by hard-wired paths.

     UNSUP.FIL         contains a list of customer-supported modules to
                       compile.   This  file applies only to sites with
                       unsupported  configurations.   It  is   on   the
                       customer-supported tape.



   9.6.1  Customizing the Build Files

   Some of the files  for  building  the  monitor  can  be  used  without
   alteration.   However,  the  following  files are only templates.  You
   must modify them to build a monitor that reflects  your  installation.
   This section lists those files and explains how to customize them.


         o  BUILDS.DCL



                                    9-22
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


            This file defines the PATH command to  run  SYS:PATH.EXE  (as
            used in the supplied .MIC and .CTL files).  This command must
            invoke   the   PATH   program   supplied    on    the    7.04
            customer-supported  CUSP  tape.   If this version of the PATH
            program is installed in SYS:  you do not need to include this
            command definition.

         o  BUILDS.MIC

            This file submits COMPIL.CTL in each FGEN area, and BUILD.CTL
            in each build area.  Edit it to use only your monitor areas.

         o  BUILDS.PTH

            This file  consists  of  three  sections,  separated  by  the
            following  string:     !<*>!  .  Each section defines logical
            names for one of the following areas:   library  areas,  FGEN
            areas, and monitor build areas.

            1.  LIBRARY AREAS

                 -  BASE:

                    This name is required.  Define it  to  point  to  the
                    area  used  to  edit any locally modified sources for
                    building.  The area should be the  superior  SFD  (or
                    UFD)  of each of the FGEN areas defined in the second
                    section of the file.

                 -  CTLS:

                    This name is required.  Define it  to  point  to  the
                    files  used  in  the  build procedures (*.MIC, *.CTL,
                    *.TEC, and *.FIL).

                 -  LOGS:

                    This name is required.  Define it  to  point  to  the
                    area that stores all the batch log files.

                 -  MON:

                    You must define this name, and  specify  the  /SEARCH
                    attribute.     The    /SEARCH    attribute    insures
                    accessibility of the files required during the  build
                    procedure.   It  points  to the distribution sources,
                    and files used in the build procedures.

                 -  SYS:, UNV:, REL:

                    These may not be  required,  but  you  must  use  the
                    current  version  of  MACRO  and  LINK  to  build the


                                    9-23
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


                    monitor.

            2.  FGEN AREAS

                The FGEN areas are used to build a  TOPS10.REL  file  for
                linking  monitors.   There is one FGEN area for each FGEN
                dialogue you complete in MONGEN.  Most installations need
                only one or two such areas:  a KL area and a KS area.

            3.  MONITOR BUILD AREAS

                The monitor build areas are used to build a  MON.EXE  for
                each system at an installation.  Define these areas to be
                in  SFDs  subordinate  to  the  appropriate  FGEN  areas.
                However, if there is only one build area corresponding to
                a given FGEN area, the two areas can point  to  the  same
                SFD.   For example, in the supplied prototype, S could be
                the same as KS.

|           Finally, the BUILDS.PTH file  contains  DECLARE  commands  to
|           define   required  monitor  commands.   This  procedure  also
|           ensures that full directory scanning is enabled for the job.
|  
|           It may not be necessary to  define  commands,  but  directory
|           scanning  is  required  for  the  job.   The commands must be
|           defined if the System Search List definition  is  not  [1,4].
|           The  automated build procedure requires that the PATH and MIC
|           commands be defined, therefore those programs must  exist  in
|           the build area if they are not in SYS.

         o  GEN.CTL

            This file runs MONGEN for each FGEN and build area.  Edit  it
            to generate only the configurations in your monitor areas.

         o  SWITCH.INI

            This file should be in the UFD  corresponding  to  the  BASE:
            area.   Define  it to run the version of PATH supplied on the
            7.04 customer-supported CUSP tape and to process  BUILDS.PTH.
            It  should  also  set  up  appropriate  defaults  for  SUBMIT
            commands.

         o  TOPS10.FIL

            TOPS10.FIL contains a list of files  to  compile.   For  each
            file,  it  lists  four  optional fields of information in the
            following format:

            <UNIV SPEC>|<COMPIL STRING>|<LIBRARY SPEC>|<AREA LIST>




                                    9-24
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


            1.  UNIV SPEC

                This field determines whether the  file  is  a  universal
                file,  and consequently, whether its COMPIL STRING should
                be duplicated in UNIV.CMD.

            2.  COMPIL STRING

                This field contains the command to give to COMPIL to  get
                the file compiled.  If the program is available as a .REL
                file (such as EDDT), leave this field blank.

            3.  LIBRARY SPEC

                This field contains the specification for the  module  to
                be  included  in  TOPS10.REL.  If this file should not be
                part of the monitor library file, leave this field blank.

            4.  AREA LIST

                This field contains the list of FGEN and build areas  for
                which the file should be compiled.


         o  UNIV.CTL

            This file forces compilation  of  all  monitor  sources.   It
            defines  a path to each FGEN area to do this.  Edit it to use
            your FGEN areas.




   9.6.2  The Build Procedure

   The following example shows the complete build procedure.  The  column
   to the left shows the commands that you type.  The column to the right
   of the commands contains explanatory remarks.


        .SUBMIT START<RET>

        .DO COMPILE MONGEN<RET>       Include this COMPILE  command  only
                                      if   you   have   made  changes  to
                                      MONGEN.MAC.

        .SUBMIT UNIV<RET>             Include  the  SUBMIT  UNIV  command
                                      only if you have submitted START.

|       .DO COMPILE modulename<RET>   Include DO COMPILE if you have made
|                                     changes  to  a  module.  The module
|                                     will be recompiled  and  a  listing


                                    9-25
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|                                     will be generated.

        .DO BUILDS<RET>               Compiles the monitor modules in the
                                      FGEN  areas, and builds MON.EXE and
                                      TOPS10.GLB.   If   you   have   not
                                      changed  the  universal files, this
                                      is  the  only  step  you  need   to
                                      perform.



   9.7  CUSTOMIZING BOOT

|  You can run the batch control file, BOOT.CTL, as distributed, to build
|  BOOT  after  you  have  started  GALAXY  (refer  to  Chapter 10).  The
|  following command submits the control file for batch processing:
|  
|       .SUBMIT BOOT.CTL<RET>
|  
|  Or, before you bring up the monitor, you can  perform  the  individual
|  steps  manually  and  modify the control file to eliminate the loading
|  procedures for hardware that does not exist at your installation.
|  
|  For a KS system, you can modify the control file  to  include  a  step
|  that creates binary files or a step to start EDDT.
|  
|  For a KL system, you can modify the control file to include or exclude
|  microcode  for  various  hardware components, as well.  This procedure
|  allows you to save space in memory, because the monitor  contains  all
|  the microcode available.
|  
|  Section 9.7.1 describes the procedure for KL systems.   Section  9.7.2
|  describes the procedure for KS systems.
|  
|  
|  
|  9.7.1  Customizing the KL BOOT
|  
|  To customize BOOT for  your  KL  system,  first  enter  the  following
|  command:
|  
|       .COMPILE/COMPILE BOOT.MAC<RET>
|  
|  The following output will appear on your terminal:
|  
|       MACRO:  BTSPRM
|          BOOT
|       [Assembling Boot for a KL10]
|       [Including DX10/TX01 driver]
|       [Including TM02 driver]
|       [Including DX20/TX02 driver]
|       [Including TM78 driver]


                                    9-26
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|       EXIT
|       .
|  
|  The files BTSPRM.UNV and BOOT.REL have been created.  Next,  run  LINK
|  to create BTONCE.EXE:
|  
|       .R LINK<RET>
|       *BTONCE/SAVE=BOOT/LOCALS/SYMSEG:LOW,REL:EDDT/GO<RET>
|       EXIT
|       .
|  
|  Now, you can run BTONCE and, by  providing  Y  or  N  answers  to  the
|  questions,   include   or   exclude  microcode  for  various  hardware
|  components.  Running BTONCE creates BOOT.EXE and BOOT.EXB.  The BTONCE
|  questions are as follows:
|  
|       .R BTONCE<RET>
|       Create binary output file [Y/N]:   Enter Y or N, then
|       Preserve EDDT and symbols [Y/N]:   press RETURN
|       Load DX10/TX01 microcode [Y/N]:
|       Load DX20/TX02 microcode [Y/N]:
|       Load DX20/RP20 microcide [Y/N]:
|       Load KLIPA/CI microcode [Y/N]:
|       Load KLNI/NI microcode [Y/N]:
|       .
|  
|  Lastly, run FILDDT to create a BOOT DDT that you can use  to  look  at
|  BOOT  in  the running monitor and examine problems that you might have
|  with your BOOT procedure.  The FILDDT prompt is File:.  Enter the file
|  name  BTONCE  followed  by the switch /S, which directs FILDDT to load
|  the symbol table from the file.  After  entering  the  file  name  and
|  switch, press RETURN:
|  
|       .R FILDDT<RET>
|       File:BTONCE/S<RET>
|       [Extracting symbols from file DSKB:BTONCE.EXE[*.*]
|       [1339 Symbols loaded from file]
|       File:
|  
|  Enter the switch /M at the File:  prompt and press RETURN.  The switch
|  /M  directs  FILDDT  to look at the running monitor.  In the following
|  discussion, note that $ represents the escape character.
|  
|  Next, enter the command string 1$U, followed by RETURN.  1$U  provides
|  FILDDT  with  the  physical  page  number  of the CPU's EPT (Executive
|  Process Table).  $U is the commmand that sets the EPT page  number  in
|  FILDDT; the EPT for CPU0 occupies physical page 1.
|  
|  Then, enter the command string  -1,,-BTSVEC$8U,  followed  by  RETURN.
|  Because  it  is  unlikely  that  the  location of the assembled symbol
|  values will match the arbitrary location selected by the  monitor  for
|  BOOT,  the  assembled values must be relocated.  $8U is the relocation


                                    9-27
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|  command, and -1,,-BTSVEC is the argument to that command.
|  
|  To exit from FILDDT, enter <CTRL/Z>.  Then  save  the  BTDDT  file  it
|  created.
|  
|       File:/M<RET>
|       [Looking at the running monitor]
|       1$U<RET>
|       -1,,-BTSVEC$8U<RET>
|       <CTRL/Z>
|       .SAVE BTDDT<RET>
|  
|  These commands create a new version of BOOT and a BTDDT that  you  can
|  now  load.   The  file  must  be  loaded  into  each  front  end  on a
|  multiple-processor KL system; repeat this procedure at the CTY of each
|  processor  in  an  SMP  system.  You must repeat the copying procedure
|  every time you rebuild the front end file system.

   The following procedure shows how to load BOOT into the front end  for
   a single-processor KL system:

        .LOG 1,2<RET>
        .RUN FE<RET>
        .

   On the CTY, type the following commands:

        <CTRL/\>
        PAR>MCR MOU<RET>
        MOU>FE0:<RET>
        MOU><CTRL/\>
        PAR>MCR PIP<RET>
        PIP>DB0:BOOT.EXB = FE0:[10,7]BOOT.EXB<RET>
        PIP><CTRL/\>
        PAR>MCR DMO<RET>
        DMO>FE0:<RET>
        DMO><CTRL/\>
        <CTRL/\>

   Now you can bring up your new monitor with the new  BOOT.EXB  file  to
   control microcode loading by the front end.
|  
|  
|  
|  9.7.2  Customizing the KS BOOT
|  
|  To customize BOOT for your KS system, enter  the  following  commands.
|  These  commands  set  the  KS feature test switch to build BOOT for KS
|  systems.  Type CTRL/Z twice to exit from COMPILE:
|  
|       .COMPILE/COMPILE TTY:+DSU:BOOT.MAC<RET>



                                    9-28
                           BUILDING YOUR MONITOR


|       MACRO:FTKL10==0<RET>
|       FTKS10==-1<RET>
|       CTRL/Z
|       CTRL/Z
|       .
|  
|  Next, run LINK and create KSONCE.EXE:
|  
|       .R LINK<RET>
|       *KSONCE/SAVE=BOOT/LOCALS/SYMSEG:LOW,REL:EDDT/GO<RET>
|       EXIT
|       .
|  
|  Now, you can modify the control file to include a  step  that  creates
|  binary  output  files  and  a  step  to  start EDDT by running KSONCE.
|  Include these functions by answering the following questions with YES:
|  
|       .R KSONCE<RET>
|       Create binary output file [Y/N]:   Enter Y or N, then
|       Preserve EDDT and symbols [Y/N]:   press RETURN
|  
|  To create KSBOOT.EXE from BOOT.EXE, type the following:
|  
|       .RENAME KSBOOT.EXE=BOOT.EXE<RET>
|  
|  Refer to Chapter 6 for the appropriate dialogue used to copy the  file
|  to the microprocessor file system.



























                                    9-29
























































                                    10-1











                                 CHAPTER 10

                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM



   After the TOPS-10 monitor is running, you can start the  GALAXY  batch
   and  spooling  system.   GALAXY is a set of programs that controls the
   batch system, the operator interface, the output devices, and requests
   for  the  disk and tape units of the operating system.  The components
   of the GALAXY system are:

        Module    Function

        ACTDAE    Accounting daemon

        BATCON    Batch controller

        CATLOG    Mountable device catalog daemon

        CDRIVE    Card reader spooler

        GLXLIB    Sharable GALAXY object-time system

        LPTSPL    Line printer spooler

|       NEBULA    DQS Spooler
|  
        OPR       Operator interface

        ORION     Operator interface controller

        PLEASE    User-to-operator communications program

        PULSAR    Tape and disk label processor

|       QUASAR    GALAXY queue manager and scheduler
|  
|       QUEUE     User spooling and mount request program
|  
|       SPRINT    Card reader interpreter
|  



                                    10-1
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


   10.1  STARTING THE GALAXY SPOOLERS

   Whenever the system is reloaded, the  GALAXY  spoolers  must  also  be
   started.   You  can  start  the spoolers by typing commands to the OPR
   program, the operator interface for  the  GALAXY  batch  and  spooling
   system.  After reloading the system, type the following command to run
   OPR:

        .R OPR<RET>
        OPR>

   OPR responds with its  prompt,  OPR>.   To  obtain  a  list  of  valid
   commands  to  the  OPR  program,  type  ?.   To obtain a list of valid
   arguments to any command, type the command and  a  ?.   To  start  the
   spoolers, type START:

|       OPR>START ?  ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
|  
|       BATCH-STREAM       CARD-PUNCH            FAL-STREAM  NODE
|  
|       NQC-STREAM         PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH      PLOTTER     PRINTER
|  
|       READER
|  
|  In this example, the ?  was typed to show the  possible  arguments  to
|  START.  To start the new GALAXY system, use each of the arguments with
|  the START command:
|  
|       OPR>START BATCH-STREAM n<RET>
|       OPR>START CARD-PUNCH n<RET>
|                 .
|                 .
|                 .
|       OPR>START PRINTER n<RET>
|       OPR>START READER n<RET>

   If you receive error messages indicating that certain objects  do  not
   exist,  you  may  ignore  them.   The  message  shows  that  a certain
   configuration does not exist at your installation.  Continue with  the
   next command.

   The spoolers can be started automatically by OPR if  you  include  the
   above commands in the file SYS:SYSTEM.CMD.

   You can ensure that the appropriate GALAXY files have been started  by
   using the OPR>SHOW STATUS command.

   The OPR  program  is  described  in  the  TOPS-10  Operator's  Command
   Language Reference Manual.





                                    10-2
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


   10.2  TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM

   This section describes the procedure for tailoring the  GALAXY  system
   to the requirements of your installation.  It describes the procedures
   necessary for running the GALGEN program, submitting the GALGEN  batch
   job, and starting the GALAXY system with the new parameters.

   It is only necessary to run GALGEN if you have made changes to  GALAXY
   modules  that  are  affected  by  GALGEN parameters, or if you wish to
   change the default parameters described in the GALGEN  program.   Note
   that  DECnet  Version  4  support is built into the distributed GALAXY
   programs; therefore, it is not necessary  to  run  GALGEN  to  include
   DECnet support.



   10.2.1  Running GALGEN

   You can run GALGEN during the installation of GALAXY or  after  GALAXY
   is started.

   The GALGEN program consists of a set of questions that allows  you  to
   change  the standard configuration to match the hardware configuration
   of your installation.  If your answers to all of the GALGEN  questions
   match  the  default  answers  (shown  in  square  brackets), it is not
   necessary for you to run the GALGEN program.   The  GALGEN  dialog  is
   shown  below  in  the LONG format.  Additional explanation is provided
   for some questions.

   You can save time and effort by building the GALAXY system in your own
   disk  area.   Copy  GALGEN.EXE  into  your area before running it, and
   follow the procedure shown here:

        .RUN GALGEN<RET>

   GALGEN begins by printing the following:

        GALGEN Version n(nnnn)

        [Starting GALAXY Generation Procedure for TOPS-10 System]
        [Writing GALAXY Configuration File DSKB:GALCNF.MAC[15,7]]

        In the following dialog, all questions are of the form:

        text of question (list or range of answers) [default answer]

        The line starts with the actual text of the question.   Following
        the question is a description of the possible answers enclosed in
        parentheses.  This description might be a  range  of  numbers,  a
        list  of  keywords,  or  a  textual  description.  Following this
        description is the default answer, enclosed in  square  brackets.
        The default will be assumed if you only press the RETURN key.


                                    10-3
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


        You have the choice of carrying on a  LONG  dialog  in  which  an
        explanation  of  each  question  is  provided automatically, or a
        SHORT dialog in which it is assumed that you  are  familiar  with
        the  GALAXY generation procedure.  In either case, you can always
        obtain the help text by typing a question mark (?) in response to
        any question.

        Answer the following  question  with  either  LONG  (for  a  long
        dialog)  or  SHORT (for a short one).  Simply pressing the RETURN
        key will imply SHORT.

        Dialog Length (SHORT,LONG) [SHORT]


                     Administrative Controls and Parameters

        The  questions  in  this  section   determine   absolute   GALAXY
        parameters,  which  cannot  be  overridden  by  user  or operator
        commands.

|       The system logs all operator interactions in a disk file  in  the
|       spooling  area.   Your answer to the following question specifies
|       the name to be used for this file.
|  
|       Operator log filename (3-6 Characters) [OPERAT]
|  
|       You have the option of maintaining a  backup  master  queue  file
|       which  may  be used in the unlikely event that the primary master
|       queue file is destroyed.
|  
|       Do you want redundant master queue file (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|       The backup file for the master queue file is useful if GALAXY  or
|       the  master  queue  file  is accidentally deleted or damaged.  It
|       records all the current queue jobs so that they will not be lost.
|  
|       Any permanently mounted structure may  be  used  for  the  master
|       queues.  The structure that is first in the system search list is
|       preferred.
|  
|       File structure to use for master queue (3-6 Characters) [SSL]
|  
|  The structure on which the master  queue  file  is  stored  should  be
|  easily  accessible  by  GALAXY.   SSL is the acronym for System Search
|  List.  Unless you are running a private version of GALAXY, you  should
|  press RETURN for this question.
|  
|       Users can  specify  a  priority  for  their  batch  and  spooling
|       requests  with  the  /PRIORITY  switch.  The allowable values for
|       this parameter range between 1 (representing lowest priority) and
|       63  (representing  the  highest).   The  following  two questions
|       relate to this switch.  The first question requests  the  maximum


                                    10-4
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|       priority which may be specified by a non-privileged user.
|  
|       Maximum priority non-privileged users may specify (1-63) [20]
|  
|       You may specify the value to be used if the user does not specify
|       a /PRIORITY switch.  This value must be between 1 and the maximum
|       priority that you specified in the previous question.
|  
|       Default for /PRIORITY on batch and spooling requests (1-63) [10]
|  
|  A queue request that is queued without the /PRIORITY switch must  take
|  a  default  priority.   The value you specify here will be used as the
|  default for such requests.  The  value  must  be  between  1  and  the
|  maximum  that  you  specified  in the previous question.  If you use 1
|  here, users will not be able to set some requests to a  priority  that
|  is  lower  than  the  default.   Therefore, it is recommended that the
|  default that you specify here be greater than 1.
|  
|  
|                            [SYSTEM]INFO Parameters
|  
|       This section allows you to set any currently defined [SYSTEM]INFO
|       control parameters.
|  
|       The [SYSTEM]INFO facility, which allows users to manipulate  PIDs
|       for  IPCF communication by symbolic names, is now part of QUASAR.
|       While [SYSTEM]INFO  normally  limits  the  maximum  length  of  a
|       symbolic  PID  name  using the GETTAB item %IPMPL (maximum packet
|       length), you have the option of specifying the maximum length  of
|       a PID name allowable at all.
|  
|       Maximum length of a PID name (29-79 Characters) [39]
|  
|  
|                                 Applications
|  
|       The following section determines which optional applications  you
|       wish to run on your system.  These applications will be accesible
|       through OPR, the operator interface program.  GALAXY supports  by
|       default the CATALOG, CONFIG, and QUOTA applications.  If you wish
|       to run additional applications (such as NCP) answer YES.
|  
|  If you answer this question  with  NO,  the  Applications  portion  of
|  GALGEN is completed.
|  
|       Do you wish to run additional applications?  (YES,NO) [YES]
|  
|  If you want to run addional applications, GALGEN asks:
|  
|       Include the LAT Control Protocol (LCP) commands?  (YES,NO) [YES]
|  
|       Include the  DECnet  Network  Control  Protocol  (NCP)  commands?


                                    10-5
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|       (YES,NO) [YES]
|  
|       You can include  installation-developed  applications  with  your
|       answers to the following questions.
|       Do you  wish  to  run  any  installation-developed  applications?
|       (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|  If you answer this  question  with  YES,  GALGEN  asks  the  following
|  questions:
|  
|       Specify the name of the application.  This name is used to access
|       the application through OPR.
|       Application name or carriage return to exit (1-20 characters)
|  
|       Each application must be associated  with  an  application  table
|       name.   This  table file contains the command syntax parsing tree
|       for the application.  Specify only the file name.
|       Table name for application (1-6 characters)
|  
|       The code to implement  an  application  can  exist  either  as  a
|       separate program (which communicates with users via ORION), or as
|       an internal module within ORION itself.
|       Internal ORION application?  (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|  If you answer this  question  with  YES,  GALGEN  asks  the  following
|  question:
|  
|       Please  specify  the  name   of   the   module   containing   the
|       application-specific  code.   This  module  will be assembled and
|       incorporated into ORION.  You need only provide  the  file  name.
|       The extension of .MAC is assumed.
|       Application module name (1-6 characters)
|  
|  
|                              Batch Job Defaults
|  
|       The questions in this section are used to define  default  values
|       for the various options that a user can specify when submitting a
|       batch job.
|  
|       The batch user can specify a maximum runtime for  his  batch  job
|       using  the  /TIME switch.  If he does not specify this switch the
|       following default will be used:
|  
|       Default batch job runtime limit (5-9999 seconds) [300]
|  
|       Every batch job has maximum  limits  for  each  type  of  spooled
|       output.   These  limits  can  be  set  by  the  batch  user  with
|       appropriate switches to the SUBMIT command.  If the user  doesn't
|       specify these switches, the following defaults will be used:
|  
|       Line printer output limit (0-9999 pages) [200]


                                    10-6
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|       Card punch output limit (0-9999 cards) [1000]
|       Paper tape punch output limit (0-5000 feet) [200]
|       Plotter output limit (0-5000 minutes) [30]
|  
|       The user can specify whether or not the batch log file should  be
|       printed  after  the job terminates by using the /OUTPUT switch to
|       the SUBMIT command.  The action is specified by:  LOG  to  always
|       print  the log file, NOLOG to never print the log file, and ERROR
|       to print the log file only if the job  ended  with  an  unhandled
|       error.   If  the  user doesn't specify this switch, the following
|       value will be used.
|  
|       Default for SUBMIT/OUTPUT (LOG,NOLOG,ERROR) [LOG]
|  
|       The system provides for the enforcement  of  a  maximum  physical
|       memory  limit  on  batch  jobs.   The  user can specify a maximum
|       memory parameter and if  any  program  attempts  to  exceed  this
|       limit, the batch job goes virtual.
|  
|  If you answer the following question with NO, the Batch  Job  Defaults
|  section of GALGEN is completed.
|  
|       Should memory limits be enforced (YES,NO) [YES]
|  
|       The user can specify a maximum memory limit by  using  the  /CORE
|       switch.   If  this  switch  is  not  specified  by  the user, the
|       following default will be used.
|  
|       Memory limit (24-16384 pages) [512]
|  
|  
|                     Line Printer Defaults and Parameters
|  
|       The questions in this section are used to set default values  for
|       the line printer spooler.
|  
|       Job banner pages are printed  at  the  beginning  of  each  print
|       request.  The user's name and any /NOTE value is printed on them.
|  
|       Number of job banner pages (0-5) [2]
|  
|       Job trailer pages are printed at the end of each  print  request.
|       The user's name and any spooler checkpoint information is printed
|       on them.
|  
|       Number of job trailer pages (0-5) [2]
|  
|       File header pages are printed before each file or  copy  in  each
|       print  request.  The file name is printed in BOLD letters on each
|       header page.
|  
|       Number of file header pages (0-5) [2]


                                    10-7
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|       The user can specify a special form for a print request with  the
|       /FORMS  switch.   If  this  switch is not specified the following
|       default will be used.
|  
|       Name for standard output forms (4-6 Characters) [NORMAL]
|  
|       The number of characters  that  uniquely  identifies  a  form  is
|       compared  with  the  current  form  name  to determine if a forms
|       change is required for a specific user request.
|  
|       Number of characters which uniquely identifies form (2-6) [4]
|  
|  The forms type that a user specifies  when  submitting  a  request  is
|  compared  with the forms type currently mounted in the printer and the
|  forms type recorded in SYS:LPFORM.INI and SYS:SPFORM.INI.  Your answer
|  to this question specifies the number of characters in the name of the
|  forms type that qualify as a match.
|  
|       There may be site-specific devices which require  special  device
|       drivers  loaded  with  LPTSPL  as  needed.  For example, the LN01
|       laser printer requires the module LPTL01 in order for  LPTSPL  to
|       load fonts as requested.
|  
|       Do you want to load any special printer drivers?  (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|  If you answer this question with YES, GALGEN asks:
|  
|       Each device driver must have its own module to be loaded with the
|       LPTSPL main module.  This module's .REL file must be found on the
|       build areas when LPTSPL is loaded.
|       Name of device driver module (1-6 characters)
|       Any more special drivers to load (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|  
|                              Parameters for MDA
|  
|       The questions in  this  section  are  used  to  set  the  default
|       parameters for the Mountable Device Allocator (MDA).
|  
|       The  following  question  allows  you  to  enable  the   deadlock
|       avoidance  code in MDA.  This code prevents jobs from waiting for
|       tape or disk resources that another job may already own, or  that
|       do not exist.  Enabling the deadlock avoidance code causes MDA to
|       use slightly more CPU time to  insure  that  deadlocks  will  not
|       occur.
|  
|       Enable deadlock avoidance?  (YES,NO) [YES]
|  
|       You have the  option  of  specifying  which  label  type  is  the
|       default.




                                    10-8
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|                                     NOTE
|  
|               Label type USER-EOT will allow a user program  to
|               see  the  end  of  tape condition on an UNLABELED
|               tape only.  All other label types will cause  the
|               user   to   block   at  end  of  tape  while  MDA
|               automatically expands the volume  set.   In  this
|               case the user program will NOT see end of tape.
|  
|       Default tape label type (ANSI,BYPASS,IBM,USER-EOT,UNLABELED)
|       [USER-EOT] 
|  
|       You have the option of specifying the default  density  at  which
|       tapes are read and written.
|  
|       Default 9-track tape density (200,556,800,1600,6250) [1600]
|       Default 7-track tape density (200,556,800) [800]
|  
|       You have the option of specifying the default track type on which
|       to mount tapes.
|  
|       Default track type (7,9) [9]
|  
|       The system administrator can allow non-privileged users to bypass
|       label processing.
|  
|       Allow bypassing for non-privileged users?  (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|  When   mounting   a   labeled   tape,   a   user   can   include   the
|  /LABEL-TYPE:BYPASS  switch  to specify that the tape label be ignored.
|  If you want this function to be restricted to privileged users, answer
|  NO  to  this  question.  If you want all users to be able to mount any
|  tape regardless of the label type, answer YES to this question.
|  
|  
|                     Miscellaneous Defaults and Parameters
|  
|       The questions in this section refer to general GALAXY parameters.
|  
|       The following section establishes default bias and disk  page  to
|       spooler unit conversion factors.
|  
|       Do you want the standard limit computation (YES,NO) [YES]
|  
|  This question refers to disk page conversion to spooler units.   (Note
|  that  one  disk page equals four disk blocks.) If you do not want this
|  conversion, answer NO to the  question.   If  you  answer  NO,  GALGEN
|  prints  the  following  and  prompts  you  for a value for each output
|  device.
|  
|       The default output limit of a spooled file is calculated as:



                                    10-9
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|            limit = disk blocks * units per disk block * copies
|  
|       The output limit is expressed in pages for the printer, cards for
|       the  card  punch, minutes for the plotter, and feet for the paper
|       tape punch.  The following  questions  establish  the  number  of
|       units of output per disk page.
|  
|       Number of printed pages per disk block [.7]
|       Number of punched cards per disk block [8]
|       Minutes of plotter output per disk block [0.07]
|       Feet of paper tape per disk block [7]
|  
|       The default action to be taken when output exceeds the  specified
|       limit  for  an  output spooler may be to ABORT the job and ignore
|       all remaining output, ASK the operator what to do, or PROCEED  to
|       finish processing the job.
|  
|       Default output-limit-exceeded action (ABORT,ASK,PROCEED) [ASK]
|  
|       If file access between network nodes is to be done,  each  FAL  -
|       file  access  listener  -  stream needs a network type associated
|       with it.  The network types supported are ANF-10 and DECnet.
|  
|       Default network-type for FAL streams (ANF-10,DECnet) [ANF-10]
|  
|       Galaxy-10 spoolers (object processors) are now grouped into three
|       categories  and  are  started  (logged-in  and  run) by QUASAR at
|       different times depending on which category they fall into.   The
|       three categories and their corresponding characteristics are:
|  
|       %ONCE    - "fired  up"  by  QUASAR  after  QUASAR  starts  ORION,
|                PULSAR,  and  CATLOG.   The spooler will never logout on
|                its own.
|  
|       %STCMD   - "fired up" by QUASAR when  an  OPR  START  command  is
|                issued  for  a  stream  controlled  by the spooler.  The
|                spooler will logout when all streams under  its  control
|                are shut down.
|  
|       %DEMND   - "fired up" by QUASAR when a job is in a queue that can
|                be  serviced by one of the spooler's job streams.  These
|                "demand" spoolers  will  logout  after  "n"  minutes  of
|                idleness.   You will be prompted below to define a value
|                for "n".
|  
|       The PRCDAT macro in QSRMAC.MAC defines the category to which each
|       supported object processor/spooler belongs.
|  
|       Number of minutes "demand" spoolers tolerate idleness (5-60) [10]
|  
|       Your site may wish to include additional symbols and values which
|       are  different from Digital's standard ones.  By specifying these


                                   10-10
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|       values here, you may further tailor  GALAXY  to  your  particular
|       installation.
|  
|       Do you wish to enter any site specific parameters?  (YES,NO) [NO]
|  
|  If you answer this question with YES, GALGEN prints the following:
|  
|       The parameters are entered as lines of text in a form  acceptable
|       for assembly by MACRO-10.  Valid examples are:
|            XP   SYMBOL,EXPRESSION  ;comment
|            ND   SYMBOL,EXPRESSION  ;comment
|            SYMBOL==EXPRESSION       ;comment
|       Where SYMBOL is a legal symbol name for MACRO-10, and  EXPRESSION
|       is  any  valid  MACRO-10  expression consisting of symbols and/or
|       constants.  The comment is any arbitrary string beginning with  a
|       semicolon.
|       Enter site specific parameter text:  (Empty line to end.)
|  
|       [End of GALGEN Dialog]
|  
|  When the dialog is finished, GALGEN writes the output file  GALCNF.MAC
|  into the disk area.  Use this output file to configure your new GALAXY
|  system.



   10.2.2  Assembling the Tailored GALAXY System

   Use the batch control file (GALAXY.CTL) provided to assemble  the  new
   GALAXY  system.  To submit a batch job, the GALAXY system and spoolers
   must be running.  GALAXY is usually started at system startup from the
   SYSJOB.INI  or  OPR.ATO  file.   You should create one of these files,
   reload the system, and start the  GALAXY  spoolers  (as  described  in
   Section 10.1).

   The GALAXY components listed below  should  be  started  automatically
   whenever  the system is reloaded.  You can accomplish this by creating
   a file named SYSJOB.INI, and  including  the  commands  to  start  the
   components  in that file.  SYSJOB.INI is described in Chapter 12.  The
   GALAXY components that must  be  started  automatically  whenever  the
   system is reloaded are:

             ACTDAE
             QUASAR

   The batch control file (GALAXY.CTL) that is included on the CUSP  tape
   uses  the  GALCNF.MAC file to generate a GALAXY system.  The batch job
   will generate the appropriate .EXE files for the GALAXY system.   Copy
   the batch control file into your area and submit it from there.

   To start the batch job, type the monitor command and press RETURN:



                                   10-11
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


        .SUBMIT GALAXY/TIME/RESTART<RET>

   If the batch job ends in an error, try to correct  the  control  file,
   then  delete  the .LOG file and submit the control file again.  If the
   error  occurs  again,  consult  a  software   specialist   or   system
   programmer.

                                    NOTE

           It is important that the batch job  run  successfully.
           Check  the  log  file  carefully  to  be  sure that no
           warning (%) errors occurred.  These errors do not  end
           the job but may cause problems later.

   When the batch job finishes successfully, a series of messages will be
   printed  on  the operator's terminal.  One message will be printed for
   each component of the GALAXY system as it is created.

   When the components are successfully created, they  are  ready  to  be
   copied  into  SYS.   Note that the system should be stand-alone during
   this  process  because  no  users  can  submit  requests  during  this
   procedure.



   10.3  SHUTTING DOWN THE GALAXY SYSTEM

   If a GALAXY system is already running, you must shut  it  down  before
   replacing it with new GALAXY modules.  Before shutting down the GALAXY
   system, you should obtain exclusive use of  the  operating  system  by
   scheduling stand-alone time for this purpose or by ending timesharing.

   Using the OPR program, stop the GALAXY system.  To run OPR,  type  the
   following command and press RETURN:

        .R OPR<RET>
        OPR>

   OPR responds with its  prompt,  OPR>.   To  obtain  a  list  of  valid
   commands  to the OPR program, type ?  at this point.  To obtain a list
   of valid arguments to any command, type the command and a ?.

|       OPR>SHUTDOWN ?  ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
|  
|       BATCH-STREAM       CARD-PUNCH            FAL-STREAM  NODE
|  
|       NQC-STREAM         PAPER-TAPE-PUNCH      PLOTTER     PRINTER
|  
|       READER
|  
|  In this example, a ?  was typed to show all the possible arguments  to
|  the  SHUTDOWN  command.   To  stop  all  the  components of the GALAXY


                                   10-12
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


|  system, type the  SHUTDOWN  command  followed  by  the  name  of  each
|  component.  For example:
|  
|       OPR>SHUTDOWN BATCH-STREAM n<RET>
|       OPR>SHUTDOWN CARD-PUNCH n<RET>
|                          .
|                          .
|                          .
|       OPR>SHUTDOWN PRINTER n<RET>
|       OPR>SHUTDOWN READER n<RET>

   During this procedure, OPR may print the  following  message  on  your
   terminal:

        --THERE ARE NO DEVICES STARTED--

   In this case, there were no devices on line for that  component.   You
   can ignore the message and go on to the next command.

   After you shut down all the components, exit from OPR.  Type EXIT  and
   press RETURN:

        OPR>EXIT<RET>
        .

   After returning to monitor level, use the SYSTAT  monitor  command  to
   determine  the  jobs that are running for GALAXY.  The GALAXY jobs may
   be named any or all of the following:
|  
|       CDRIVE
|       CATLOG
|       NEBULA
|       IBMSPL
|  
   Using the ATTACH command, attach to each job and log it out.

   The GALAXY programs that are currently running must now be copied to a
   backup  area  from  SYS.  In the following example, they are copied to
   OLD ([1,3]).
|  
|    .COPY [1,3]=[1,4]CDRIVE.EXE,CATLOG.EXE,NEBULA.EXE,IBMSPL.EXE<RET>
|  
|    .
|  
   You must also delete the master queue files.  The master  queue  files
   can be deleted with the following command:

        .DELETE SYS:QSRMS1.*<RET>

        FILES DELETED:
        SYS:QSRMS1.QSR
        221 BLOCKS FREED


                                   10-13
                STARTING UP AND TAILORING THE GALAXY SYSTEM


   Now you can copy the new files to SYS and  bring  up  the  new  GALAXY
   system.



   10.4  STARTING THE GALAXY SYSTEM

   After you stop the old GALAXY system, you can  start  the  new  GALAXY
   system.   The first step is to copy all the new GALAXY files into SYS.
   The new files will automatically supersede the old files in SYS.   Use
   the COPY command to copy all the .EXE files from your area to SYS.

        .COPY SYS:=*.EXE<RET>

   You can start the GALAXY programs  by  reloading  the  system  if  the
   system  has  a  file  SYS:SYSJOB.INI that logs in the system programs.
   The SYSJOB.INI file is described in Chapter 12.  To start  the  GALAXY
   programs  manually,  reload the system by typing CTRL/\ on the CTY and
   typing the SHUTDOWN command to the parser.  Then reload the system, as
   demonstrated here:

        <CTRL/\>

        PAR>SHUTDOWN<RET>

        DECSYSTEM-10 NOT RUNNING

        [Dumping on DSKB:CRASH.EXE[1,4]]

        [Loading from DSK:SYSTEM.EXE[1,4]]

        TOPS-10 704 Development mmm-dd-yy

        Why reload:SCHED<RET>
        Date:NOV-29-87<RET>
        Time:17:55<RET>

        Startup option:GO<RET>

        TOPS-10 704 Development NOV-29-87
        .

   Now log in with the PPN [1,2] and start  up  the  GALAXY  spoolers  by
   running the OPR program, as described in Section 10.1.










                                   10-14











                                 CHAPTER 11

                 MAINTAINING THE SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION FILE



   The REACT program enables you to  maintain  the  system  authorization
   file, ACTDAE.SYS.  This chapter describes how to use REACT commands to
   create, change, and delete user accounts.  It also  describes  how  to
   update  the master accounting file, and enable account validation.  To
   change  user  accounts  with  REACT,  you  must  have   administrative
   privileges (JP.ADM in JBTPRV).

   The REACT Command Tables at the end  of  this  chapter  provide  quick
   reference to the commands discussed in Sections 11.4 through 11.8.



   11.1  CONVERTING OLD ACCOUNTING FILES

   The REACT shipped with TOPS-10 Version 7.04 requires that you use  the
   ACTDAE.SYS  accounting  file.   If your system currently uses ACCT.SYS
   and AUXACC.SYS files, you can use a program called  NEWACT  to  create
   the new accounting file, ACTDAE.SYS.

   To convert ACCT.SYS and AUXACC.SYS files to the ACTDAE.SYS format, use
   the NEWACT program as shown below:

        1.  Run NEWACT.

            NEWACT looks up the ACCT.SYS, AUXACC.SYS, and USERS.TXT files
            and uses the information in them to create the new ACTDAE.SYS
            file.  If you  do  not  want  the  information  in  USERS.TXT
            included  in  your  new accounting file, delete the USERS.TXT
            file.

        2.  Copy the new ACTDAE.SYS file to SYS.



   11.2  ENTERING AND EXITING REACT

   The following examples show how to enter and exit the REACT program.


                                    11-1
   To enter REACT type the following:

        .R REACT<RET>
        REACT>

   To exit the REACT program and return to monitor  command  level,  type
   EXIT and press RETURN:

        REACT>EXIT<RET>
        .



   11.3  GETTING HELP WHILE USING REACT

|  There are three different ways to get help while using REACT:   typing
|  a question mark, typing HELP, and pressing the ESCape key.
|  
|  For information  about  REACT  top-level  commands,  you  can  type  a
|  question mark to display a list of the command keywords:
|  
|       .R REACT<RET>
|       REACT>?  one of the following:
|       CHANGE DELETE EXIT HELP INSERT LIST LOCK PURGE SELECT SHOW
|       UNLOCK VERIFY
|  
|  If you type HELP and press return, REACT will print out a list of  the
|  commands and a brief description of each:
|  
|       REACT>HELP<RET>
|                              Help for REACT %33B(242)
|       CHANGE       Change profile entries
|       DELETE       Delete a profile
|       EXIT         Exit program
|       HELP         Gives information on commands
|       INSERT       Insert a profile into the accounting file
|       LIST         Write profile information to a file
|       LOCK         Lock accounting file against updates
|       PURGE        Purge expired profiles
|       SELECT       Select wildcarding criteria
|       SHOW         Display profile information on the terminal
|       UNLOCK       Unlock accounting file to allow updates
|       VERIFY       Verify the accounting file from a master file
|  
|  If you type HELP and a command name, REACT provides a  description  of
|  that command:
|  
|       REACT>HELP CHANGE<RET>
|                              Help for REACT %33B(242) - CHANGE
|       The CHANGE command enables you to enter user mode and modify user
|       profiles.  The syntax is:  CHANGE user-id
|  
|  Once you  have  entered  enough  characters  to  uniquely  identify  a
|  command, you may press the ESCape key.  When you press the ESCape key,
|  REACT completes the rest of the command name  for  you,  and  provides


                                    11-2
|  guidewords  in parentheses to help you complete the command line.  For
|  example, if you type 'cha' and press the ESCape key:
|  
|       REACT>cha<ESC>
|       REACT>chaNGE (user-id)
|  
|  Table 11-2 provides a complete list of top-level  commands  and  their
|  functions.
|  
|  When you are in user-mode, type a question mark to display commands:
|  
|       REACT>CHANGE [27,150]<RET>
|       USER>?  one of the following:
|       ACCESS-TYPES           CONTEXT-QUOTAS      CORE-LIMITS
|       DISTRIBUTION-LOCATION  ENQ-DEQ-QUOTA       EXPIRATION-DATE
|       IPCF-QUOTAS            LOGIN-TIMES         MAILING-ADDRESS
|       NAME                   PASSWORD            PERSONAL-NAME
|       PRIVILEGES             PROFILE-DEFAULT     PROGRAM-TO-RUN
|       REQUIREMENTS           SCHEDULAR-TYPE      SPOOLED-DEVICES
|       STRUCTURE-QUOTAS       WATCH-BITS
|         or one of the following:
|       DEFAULT  DONE     HELP     QUIT     RESTORE   SHOW
|  
|  In user-mode, you may ask for HELP on specific commands:
|  
|       USER>HELP ACCESS-TYPES<RET>
|  
|       ACCESS-TYPES  specifies  the  types  of  access  allowed  to  the
|       specified  user.   ACCESS  refers  to any attempt by a user or in
|       behalf of a user to gain access to the  system  using  a  correct
|       combination of user-id and password.
|  
|  You may also use the ESCape  key  when  you  are  in  user-mode.   For
|  example, if you type 'acc' and press the ESCape key:
|  
|       USER>acc<ESC>
|       USER>accESS-TYPES (allowed)
|  
|  
|  
|  11.4  DISPLAYING USER ACCOUNT INFORMATION
|  
|  The SHOW command  displays  information  about  users  listed  in  the
|  accounting file.  To display a user's profile, type the following:
|  
|       REACT>SHOW user-id/switch<RET>
|  
|  Where user-id can be the user name  or  PPN  of  an  existing  account
|  profile.  You may optionally include one of the following switches:
|  
|       /DETAIL  lists all user profile information (default)
|       /FAST    lists only the user-name and PPN
|  
|  Characteristics of the profile that have not  been  changed  from  the
|  default  are  designated  by an asterisk at the beginning of the line.


                                    11-3
|  An example of a user profile is included in Section 11.5.2.
|  
|  
|  
|  11.5  CREATING NEW ACCOUNTS
|  
|  The INSERT command allows you to create new  accounts,  singly  or  in
|  groups,  and to define the attributes of the accounts you create.  The
|  attributes you define for a user's account make up the user's profile.
|  You must specify a user-id when you use the INSERT command.
|  
|  
|  
|  11.5.1  Creating Multiple Accounts with the Same Project Number
|  
|  You can create a group of accounts with the same  project  number  and
|  different  programmer  numbers, using the INSERT command.  To do this,
|  you supply a wildcard character (*) for the programmer number.
|  
|  The example below shows how to create a group of 5 accounts  with  the
|  project  number  25,  programmer  numbers  100  through 500, using the
|  default profile, with names and passwords supplied by REACT.
|  
|       .R REACT<RET>
|       REACT>INSERT [25,*]<RET>
|       Base programmer number:  100<RET>
|  
|  Supply the first programmer number in the series you want to create.
|  
|       Programmer number increment:  100<RET>
|  
|  Supply the number to increment each programmer number.   By  selecting
|  100,  the programmer number for the first account, n, will be 100; for
|  the second account, n+100; for the third account n+100+100; and so on.
|  
|       Count of PPNs to insert:  5<RET>
|  
|  Supply the number of PPNs you wish to create.
|  
|       Prompt for user's name?  N<RET>
|  
|  Respond YES if you want REACT to prompt you for the user name for each
|  account  you  create.   If you respond NO, REACT generates a user name
|  for each account it generates in this series, but you may  change  the
|  name later.
|  
|       Prompt for password?  N<RET>
|  
|  Enter YES if you want REACT to prompt you for the  password  for  each
|  account  you  create.   If  you  enter  NO,  REACT  generates a random
|  password for each account it creates  in  this  series,  but  you  may
|  change the password later.  REACT creates the accounts:
|  




                                    11-4
|       [READPL Default profile loaded:  [%,%]]
|        User [25,100] 25,100 inserted with password GLAMDIRK
|        User [25,200] 25,200 inserted with password SNAKAIZ
|        User [25,300] 25,300 inserted with password RENGLYPCH
|        User [25,400] 25,400 inserted with password IZMOPWIQ
|        User [25,500] 25,500 inserted with password FILZNIKR
|        A total of 5 users inserted
|       REACT>
|  
|  To SHOW the accounts you just created, type the SHOW command  followed
|  by the [project number, wildcard character]/SWITCH and press RETURN:
|  
|       REACT>SHOW [25,*]/FAST<RET>
|       25,100  25,100
|       25,200  25,200
|       25,300  25,300
|       25,400  25,400
|       25,500  25,500
|        A total of 5 users listed
|       REACT>
|  
|  
|  
|  11.5.2  Creating a Single New User Account
|  
|  To create a single new user account,  type  INSERT,  followed  by  the
|  user-id.   If  you  aren't sure which programmer numbers are available
|  within a specific project number group, you can use the  SHOW  command
|  combined with the switch /FAST to suppress profile information:
|  
|       REACT>SHOW [27,*]/FAST<RET>
|       27,100  OLDUSER
|       27,200  VERYOLDUSER
|       27,300  ANCIENTUSER
|        A total of 3 users listed
|       REACT>
|  
|  When you create a new account, the user-id may be a user name or  PPN.
|  After  entering  the user name, you may supply an existing user-id for
|  REACT to use as a model for the new profile.  If you do not supply  an
|  existing  user-id,  REACT  uses a default profile to establish initial
|  values for the account attributes.  The  following  examples  use  the
|  name  NEWUSER for the new-user-id, and, in the second example, OLDUSER
|  for the existing-user-id:
|  
|       REACT>INSERT NEWUSER<RET>
|       New user PPN:  [27,150]<RET>
|  or
|       REACT>INSERT NEWUSER=OLDUSER<RET>
|       New user PPN:  [27,150]<RET>
|  
|  If the new-user-id has already been assigned, REACT  prints  an  error
|  message:
|  
|       %REANAE Name NEWUSER is already taken by [P,PN]


                                    11-5
|       REACT>
|  
|  If the new-user-id is valid, but the PPN you have specified is already
|  assigned, REACT prints an error message:
|  
|       %REAPAE PPN [P,PN] is already taken by OTHERUSER
|       REACT>
|  
|  If both the new-user-id and the PPN are valid, and  if  you  have  not
|  supplied  an  existing user-id to use as a model, REACT uses a default
|  profile to establish initial values for the account attributes.  After
|  either  of  these  have  been done, REACT enters user mode and you can
|  make changes to any of the attributes that do not fit the requirements
|  of the new user.
|  
|  The following example shows how to create an account for user  NEWUSER
|  using the default profile:
|  
|       REACT>INSERT NEWUSER<RET>
|       New user PPN:  [27,150]<RET>
|       [READPL Default profile loaded:[27,%]]
|       USER>
|  
|  To display the default profile attributes of NEWUSER's  account,  type
|  the SHOW command and press RETURN at the USER> prompt:
|  
|       USER>SHOW<RET>
|          PPN:  [27,150]
|          User name:  NEWUSER
|          Profile default:  [27,%] or [%,%]
|        * Personal name:  -none-
|        * Distribution location:  -none-
|        * Mailing address:  -none-
|        * Expiration date:  -none-
|        * LOGIN times:  Weekdays 0:23  Weekends 0:23
|        * Access types:  Card reader, Network file  access,  Local,  ANF
|          CTY, Dataset, Remote, Subjob of batch, Batch
|        * Requirements for LOGIN:
|               Account and remark strings are not required
|               Name is not required
|               Password under timesharing and batch
|               Password change at next LOGIN
|               Minimum password length:  6
|               Password change interval:  Every 90 days
|               Password changes are allowed
|        * Schedular type:  0
|        * Program to run:  -none-
|        * Context-quotas:  Context 4, Total pages 512
|        * Core limits:  Physical 512, Virtual 512
|        * ENQ/DEQ quota:  100
|        * IPCF quotas:  Send 2, Receive 5, PIDs 2
|        * Privileges:  Disk priority:  3,  HPQ:   15,  System  operator,
|          ENQ-DEQ,  IPCF,  LOCK,  METER, CPU, SPY-all-core, SPY-monitor,
|          Unspooling
|        * Spooled device bits:  CDP, CDR, LPT, PLT, PTP


                                    11-6
|        * Watch-bits:  MTA
|        * Structure quotas:
|          Structure  Quota in  Quota out  Reserved  Status
|          ---------  --------  ---------  --------  ------
|            DSKB        80000      20000         0
|            DSKC        80000      20000         0
|          Administrative data:
|          Profile last changed by [27,300] at 29-Sep-87 14:33:20
|          Last access -never-
|          Last password change 29-Sep-87 14:33:20
|  
|  Complete the insertion with the command DONE:
|  
|       USER>DONE<RET>
|        User [27,150] newuser inserted with password poobah
|        A total of one user inserted
|       REACT>
|  
|  To modify  any  of  the  attributes  of  NEWUSER's  account,  see  the
|  description of user-mode commands in the next section.
|  
|  
|  
|  11.6  CHANGING ACCOUNTS
|  
|  The CHANGE command allows you to modify the attributes of an  existing
|  user  profile.   Before  you  change a user's profile, you may want to
|  display the profile to check the current values and settings.  Use the
|  SHOW command and supply a user-id to display a profile.
|  
|  To modify user NEWUSER's profile,  type  CHANGE  and  the  user-id  or
|  [P,PN]  and press RETURN.  After you have made changes, enter DONE and
|  press  RETURN.   The  following  example  shows  how  to  change   the
|  expiration date of NEWUSER's account:
|  
|       REACT>CHANGE [27,150]<RET>
|       USER>?  one of the following:
|       ACCESS-TYPES           CONTEXT-QUOTAS      CORE-LIMITS
|       DISTRIBUTION-LOCATION  ENQ-DEQ-QUOTA       EXPIRATION DATE
|       IPCF-QUOTAS            LOGIN-TIMES         MAILING-ADDRESS
|       NAME                   PASSWORD            PERSONAL-NAME
|       PRIVILEGES             PROFILE-DEFAULT     PROGRAM-TO-RUN
|       REQUIREMENTS           SCHEDULAR-TYPE      SPOOLED-DEVICES
|       STRUCTURE-QUOTAS       WATCH-BITS
|         or one of the following:
|       DEFAULT     DONE     HELP     QUIT     RESTORE     SHOW
|       USER>EXPIRATION-DATE 31-DEC-89<RET>
|       USER>DONE<RET>
|        User [27,150] newuser changed
|        A total of one user changed
|       REACT>






                                    11-7
|  11.7  DELETING ACCOUNTS
|  
|  The DELETE command removes a user account from  ACTDAE.SYS.   You  can
|  use  wildcards  in  a  PPN to delete multiple accounts.  The following
|  example deletes user NEWUSER's account.
|  
|       REACT>SHOW NEWUSER/FAST<RET>
|            27,150    NEWUSER
|        A total of one user listed
|       REACT>DELETE [27,150]<RET>
|  
|  REACT responds with:
|  
|       User [27,150] newuser, expiration date:  31-Dec-89
|       Are you sure?
|  
|  This question prevents you from accidentally deleting  accounts.   You
|  can  respond  to this question with NO, QUIT, SHOW, or YES.  Use NO or
|  QUIT if you do not want to delete the account.  Use  SHOW  to  display
|  the profile (the question "Are you sure?" will be repeated).  Type YES
|  only if you want to delete the account.  If you type YES, REACT prints
|  the following messages:
|  
|        Are you sure?  YES<RET>
|        User [27,150] newuser deleted
|        A total of one user deleted.
|       REACT>
|  
|  Use the SHOW command to check that you  have  deleted  user  NEWUSER's
|  account.
|  
|       REACT>SHOW NEWUSER<RET>
|       ?REANSU No such user newuser
|  
|  
|  
|  11.8  VERIFYING CHANGES TO ACCOUNTING FILES
|  
|  To use the VERIFY command, you must first have a copy of ACTDAE.SYS in
|  your  disk  area to use as a master accounting file.  The default file
|  name for this copy is MASTER.SYS.  The VERIFY command is used to check
|  for  differences  between  the master file (MASTER.SYS) and the system
|  file (ACTDAE.SYS), and to update MASTER.SYS to reflect  valid  changes
|  that  have  been  made  to  ACTDAE.SYS.   You can list the differences
|  between the two files and then decide whether or not you want REACT to
|  update MASTER.SYS.
|  
|  Before issuing the VERIFY command to REACT, you must lock  ACTDAE.SYS.
|  Issuing  the  LOCK  command  opens  ACTDAE.SYS  in  read-only mode and
|  prevents other users from making changes to it while you are  updating
|  the master file.  To lock ACTDAE.SYS, type LOCK and press RETURN:
|  
|       REACT>LOCK<RET>
|       [REALOK Accounting file locked; changes are prohibited]
|       REACT>


                                    11-8
|  To use the VERIFY command, type the following command to REACT:
|  
|       REACT>VERIFY master-file user-id/switch<RET>
|  
|  You may include a user-id (user name or  PPN)  after  the  master-file
|  name, to check only that user profile against the same user profile in
|  ACTDAE.SYS.  If you include a PPN,  you  can  also  use  the  wildcard
|  character (*) to VERIFY a group of accounts.
|  
|  You may also include one or more of the following switches:
|  
|       /REPORT        Lists the account attributes of user profiles that
|                      are different from those in the system file.  This
|                      action is taken by default.
|  
|       /NOREPORT      Does not list the account attributes of  the  user
|                      profiles that are different from the system file.
|  
|       /UPDATE        Allows you to update the master file with  changes
|                      from  the  system  file.  This is the default, but
|                      after listing the differences between  the  master
|                      file  and  the system file, REACT will ask whether
|                      or not you want to UPDATE the master file.
|  
|       /NOUPDATE      Does not allow you to update the master file  with
|                      changes from the system file.
|  
|  To list differences throughout the entire master file, for all users:
|  
|       REACT>VERIFY MASTER.SYS<RET>
|  
|       Master file:           DSKC:MASTER.SYS[1,2]
|       Accounting file:       DSKA:ACTDAE.SYS[1,4]
|       Temporary file:        DSKC:039REA.TMP[1,2]
|       Verifying:             [*,*] /REPORT /UPDATE
|  
|  REACT lists the profile information for any  user  profiles  that  are
|  different  from the system accounting file.  This listing is identical
|  to the display from the SHOW command, illustrated in  Section  11.5.2.
|  Then,  to  make  sure you want to UPDATE the master file, REACT prints
|  the following question:
|  
|       Preserve changes?
|  
|  You can respond with NO, QUIT, SHOW, or YES.  If you  want  to  delete
|  the  changes  from  your master file, type NO or QUIT.  To display the
|  changes, type SHOW.  If you want to keep the changes, type YES.
|  
|  Then, unlock ACTDAE.SYS:
|  
|       REACT>UNLOCK<RET>
|       [REAUNL Accounting file unlocked; changes are permitted]





                                    11-9
|  11.9  USING ACCOUNT VALIDATION
|  
|  The USAGE file accounting system provides ASCII files containing  data
|  useful  in billing users for system usage.  The accounting daemon (the
|  ACTDAE program) can provide validation of account strings  when  users
|  log in, and write usage data in the USAGE files.
|  
|  For details on the format of the USAGE  file  entries,  refer  to  the
|  TOPS-10/20  USAGE File Specification.  The following sections describe
|  the procedure for enabling account validation.
|  
|  To enable account validation, do the following:
|  
|       1.  Answer Y to Question 10 in the SYSGEN portion of MONGEN
|  
|       2.  Require  account  validation  for  LOGIN  for  each  PPN   in
|           ACTDAE.SYS.  See Section 11.6.

        3.  Create the account validation file PROJCT.ACT.

        4.  Run  the  program  PROJCT.EXE  to  convert  PROJCT.ACT   into
            PROJCT.SYS.

        5.  Copy PROJCT.SYS into ersatz device SYS: (PPN is [1,4]).



   11.9.1  CREATING THE PROJCT.ACT FILE

   PROJCT.ACT is an ASCII  file  you  can  create  to  associate  account
   strings with PPNs.  The format of each line in PROJCT.ACT is:

        [P,PN]=ACCOUNT1,ACCOUNT2,ACCOUNT3,...


   You can use the * and ? wildcard characters  in  the  PPNs.   You  can
   substitute  the  * for either the project number or programmer number,
   or both.  You can substitute the ? for a single digit in the PPN.

|  For example,  the  PPN  definition  [27?,3007]  would  define  account
|  strings  for [27n,3007], where 'n' equals any number from 0 to 7.  The
|  PPN definition [27,*] would define account strings for all  programmer
|  numbers with the project number 27, or [27,n] through [27,nnnnnn].
|  
   A single PPN can be defined to accept any number of  account  strings,
   each  of  which  is  an  ASCII  sequence  of  up  to 39 alphanumerical
   characters.  The account strings must match  user  input  (at  LOGIN),
   exactly,  including  the  casing  of  letters.   If the account string
   definition in PROJCT.ACT is all uppercase, for example, the user  must
   type the account string in all uppercase form.

   You can allow the user to log in without typing an account  string  by
   defining  a  default  account  string  for  the PPN.  Use the /DEFAULT
   switch after one of the account strings that is valid for  the  user's
   PPN.   Then,  when  the user logs in, (s)he can simply press RETURN in


                                   11-10
   response to the ACCOUNT: prompt.  The session will be charged  to  the
   default account string.  For example, the following account definition
   allows the user to default accounting data to the first account string
   in the definition (PUBLICATIONS):

        [27,5434]=PUBLICATIONS/DEFAULT,MARKETING,MAINTENANCE

   The PPN entries in the  PROJCT.ACT  file  must  occur  in  numerically
   ascending  order.   In  the  case  of  wildcard  characters,  the * is
   equivalent to 777777, and the ? is equivalent to a 7.  In  case  of  a
   conflict  between  a  wildcarded  number  and  an explicit number, the
   wildcarded PPN  must  follow  the  explicit  PPN.   For  example,  the
   following order is valid:

        [10,10]=ABC
        [10,2370]=DEF,GHI
        [10,23??]=FOO
        [10,*]=GHI
        [*,*]=JKL

   Note that, under this scheme, the user with PPN [10,10] may not log in
   with  account string JKL, because an explicit definition overrides any
   subsequent definitions.  However, the user with PPN [10,2370] can  log
   in  with account string GHI, because any number of account strings can
   be valid for a single PPN.

   Account strings can also contain wildcard characters.  The  *  in  the
   account  string  definition denotes account strings with any number of
   characters (or no characters) to replace it.  However, when  the  ? is
   used  to  replace  a  character,  it  must  be matched by a character.
   Therefore, the account string ABC??FG* can be matched only by  account
   strings containing ABC for the first three characters, followed by any
   two characters, containing FG for the sixth  and  seventh  characters,
   followed by no more or any number of characters.



   11.9.2  CREATING THE PROJCT.EXE FILE

   After you create  PROJCT.ACT,  and  ensure  that  it  exists  in  your
   directory path, run the PROJCT.EXE program as shown below:

        .R PROJCT<RET>

        END OF JOB
        EXIT
        .

   If an error occurs  during  processing  the  PROJCT.ACT  file,  PROJCT
   displays  a message indicating the field or problem in the input file.
   Edit the PROJCT.ACT file to correct the problem, and run PROJCT again.
   When  successful,  PROJCT creates the PROJCT.SYS file.  Copy this file
   into SYS:

   When account validation  has  been  enabled,  the  user  will  see  an


                                   11-11
   additional   prompt  in  the  LOGIN  dialogue  (ACCOUNT:),  after  the
   PASSWORD:  prompt.  See the TOPS-10 Operating System  Commands  Manual
   for more information.



   11.10  MAINTAINING LOGIN FAILURE RECORDS

   REACT uses the FAILUR.LOG file to maintain records on login  failures.
   All  records  in  the  FAILUR.LOG file are written in 7-bit ASCII, and
   vary in length.  All validation failure entries have the  same  format
   for  the  first eleven fields.  The following table explains the first
   eleven fields of the FAILUR.LOG file:

   Table 11-1:  FAILUR.LOG File Format

     #    Field        Pos  Data Type  Comments

     001  Error code   001  Octal      Error code defined in ACTSYM

     002  Usage style
          Date/Time    003  Decimal    Same format as usage entries

     003  Job number   017  Decimal    Job number of QUEUE./IPCF sender

     004  PPN (LH)     020  Octal      PPN (left half) of above job

     005  PPN (RH)     026  Octal      PPN (right half) of above job

     006  Username     032  ASCII      12 charcacter name of above job

     007  Program
          name         044  ASCII      6 character program name

     008  TTY name     050  ASCII      Example: TTY45

     009  Node name    056  ASCII      Node name of job
                                       (ANF-10, DECnet, or LAT)

     010  Line name    072  ASCII      Line name on above node

     011  APC code     075  Octal      Asynchronous port characteristic


   The following table shows the format for fields that end  the  Invalid
   account string (1) and Invalid password (6) error entries.

     #    Field        Pos  Data Type  Comments

     012  PPN (LH)     077  Octal      PPN (left half) whose account
                                       string was invalid.

     013  PPN (RH)     083  Octal      PPN (right half) as above

   The job not privileged entry (3) only contains  the  first  11  fields


                                   11-12
   because the job number is already specified.



   11.11  TOP-LEVEL REACT COMMANDS

   The following table describes the basic action Commands for  creating,
   changing,  and  deleting  accounts.   It  also  describes commands for
   updating the master accounting file and displaying user information.

   Table 11-2:  Top-level REACT Commands

     Command                       Function

     CHANGE userid                 Enables you to enter  user-mode  and
                                   modify user profiles.

     DELETE userid/ASK (default)
                  /NOASK           Removes the specified  account  from
                                   ACTDAE.SYS.    You   can  specify  a
                                   wildcard in the userid.  /ASK is the
                                   default.    /ASK   causes  REACT  to
                                   prompt you to confirm each  deletion
                                   you  make.   If  you specify /NOASK,
                                   REACT does not prompt you to confirm
                                   each deletion.

     EXIT                          Exits the REACT program and  returns
                                   you to monitor command level.

     HELP                          Displays  information  about   REACT
                                   commands.   To  display a brief list
                                   of REACT  top-level  commands,  type
                                   HELP  and press RETURN.  To get more
                                   information about a particular REACT
                                   command,  type  HELP and the command
                                   name.

     INSERT userid [=userid]       Enables you to enter  user-mode  and
                                   create   user   accounts.   You  can
                                   supply an optional  existing  userid
                                   to  use  as  a  guide  for  the  new
                                   profile.

     LIST userid filespec/switch   Writes    information    from    the
                                   specified  user's profile to a file.
                                   You can specify a  wildcard  in  the
                                   userid.      The     default    file
                                   specification  is   DSK:ACCT.LST[-].
                                   Switches  are:  /DETAIL, which lists
                                   all  the  information  in  a  user's
                                   profile, and /FAST, which lists only
                                   the PPN and its associated username.
                                   /DETAIL is the default.



                                   11-13
     LOCK                          Opens ACTDAE.SYS in READ-ONLY  mode,
                                   to  prevent  other users from making
                                   changes to the file while you update
                                   the master accounting file.
|  
|    PURGE                         Deletes expired profiles.

     SELECT                        Allows you  to  mark  accounts  that
                                   have  certain  profile attributes in
                                   common.  You use the SELECT  command
                                   to  specify  the attributes that you
                                   want as identifiers for  the  group.
                                   After  you  mark  the  accounts as a
                                   group,  you   can   change   various
                                   attributes  of  the  profiles  as  a
                                   group,   rather   than   doing    so
                                   individually.

                                   For   example,   to    extend    the
                                   expiration date of all accounts that
                                   expire on December 31,  you  do  the
                                   following:  SELECT the accounts that
                                   have the expiration date you want to
                                   change,  and  CHANGE  the expiration
                                   date to the desired date.

     SHOW userid                   Displays   information   from    the
                                   specified  user's  profile.  You can
                                   specify a wildcard  in  the  userid.
                                   Switches    are:    /DETAIL,   which
                                   displays all the  information  in  a
                                   user's  profile,  and  /FAST,  which
                                   displays  only  the  PPN   and   its
                                   associated username.  /DETAIL is the
                                   default.

     UNLOCK                        Reopens  ACTDAE.SYS  so  that  other
                                   users may access it.

     VERIFY [filespec] user-id/switch

|                                  Checks  for  differences  between  a
|                                  master  accounting file (MASTER.SYS)
|                                  and the  system  file  (ACTDAE.SYS).
|                                  You  can  specify  a particular user
|                                  account or verify  all  PPNs.   This
|                                  command   allows  you  to  list  the
|                                  differences between your master file
|                                  and the system accounting file, and,
|                                  optionally,   update   the    master
|                                  accounting file.  The user-id can be
|                                  either a [P,PN] or a user name.   If
|                                  the   username  includes  characters
|                                  other than A-Z, a-z, hyphen  (-)  or
|                                  digits,   you  must  enclose  it  in


                                   11-14
|                                  double quotes.



   11.12  USER-MODE COMMANDS

   User-mode commands are subcommands to the CHANGE, INSERT,  and  SELECT
   commands, and consist of the following types of commands:
|  
|        o  COMMANDS to perform the changes specified with  Field  Change
|           Commands.  These commands are listed in Table 11-2.
|  
|        o  COMMANDS to change customer-defined fields that  specify  the
|           customer-defined  user account field that you want to change.
|           You can  define  customer-defined  FIELDS  in  REACTU.MAC  to
|           tailor  the  REACT  program  to  the  special  needs  of your
|           installation.
|  
|        o  COMMANDS to change  account  fields  that  specify  the  user
|           account  field  that  you want to change.  These commands are
|           listed in Table 11-3.
|  
   The following prompt indicates that you have entered user mode:

        USER>

   The following table lists REACT Commands to change fields.

   Table 11-3:  REACT Field Change Commands

     Command               Function

     ALL                   Allows you to specify all of the options for
                           a given field change command.

     AND                   Allows you  to  specify  selection  criteria
                           with the SELECT command.

     ACCESS-TYPES          Specifies the types of access allowed to the
                           specified user.  An access is any attempt by
                           a user, or in behalf  of  a  user,  to  gain
                           access   to   the  system  using  a  correct
                           combination   of   user-id   and   password.
                           ACCESS-TYPES  include  following:   ANF-CTY,
                           BATCH,    DATA-SET,    FILES-ONLY,    LOCAL,
                           NETWORK-FILE-ACCESS,   PHYSICAL-CARD-READER,
                           REMOTE, SUBJOB-OF-BATCH.

     CONTEXT-QUOTAS        Specifies the limits governing  the  use  of
                           job  contexts.   The  context  quota  is the
                           number of contexts a user may  have  at  any
                           one  time.   Each logged in job has at least
                           one (current) context.  The maximum is  511.
                           A  quota  of  zero  indicates no limit.  The
                           saved page quota is the number of  pages  of


                                   11-15
                           swapping  space  a user may occupy with idle
                           contexts.  A  quota  of  zero  indicates  no
                           limit.   Refer  to  the  description  of job
                           contexts in  the  TOPS-10  Operating  System
                           Commands Manual for more information.

     CORE-LIMITS           Specifies a decimal value for  the  physical
                           and  virtual  limit  of the number of pages.
                           The maximum  number  of  physical  pages  is
                           8,192.   The maximum number of virtual pages
                           is 16,384.

     DISTRIBUTION-LOCATION Specifies text to be displayed on the banner
                           page(s)   of   spooled   output.   The  text
                           indicates   where   the   operator    should
                           distribute the user's output.

     DONE                  Writes the changes to the ACTDAE.SYS file.

     ENQ-DEQ-QUOTA         Specifies a decimal value for the number  of
                           outstanding  ENQ  locks.  The maximum number
                           is 511.

     EXPIRATION-DATE       Specifies the date and time when  LOGINs  to
                           this account are no longer allowed.

     IPCF-QUOTAS           Specifies a  decimal  value  for  the  SEND,
                           RECEIVE,  and PID quotas.  The maximum value
                           for each quota is 511.

     HELP                  Displays  help  text   for   the   specified
                           user-mode command.

     LOGIN-TIMES           Specifies the time of the day  the  user  is
                           allowed to LOGIN.  Weekdays are divided into
                           24 one-hour segments.  Weekends are  divided
                           into  12 two-hour segments.  Therefore, if a
                           user is permitted to LOGIN  on  Saturday  at
                           7:00 AM, the user can actually LOGIN between
                           6:00 AM and 7:59 AM.

     NAME                  Specifies the  username  for  this  profile.
                           The  username  can  consist of any printable
                           character except the  following:  %,  *,  or
                           / .  It can be up to 39 characters long, and
                           it cannot begin with a numeric character.

     NO                    Allows  you  to  specify  options  to  field
                           change commands

     NONE                  Allows you to disallow all of the options to
                           a given field change command.

     NOT                   Allows you  to  specify  selection  criteria
                           with the SELECT command.


                                   11-16
     OR                    Allows you  to  specify  selection  criteria
                           with the SELECT command.

     PASSWORD              Specifies a password the user must  type  to
                           gain access to the system.  The password can
                           consist of any printable characters, and can
                           be up to 39 characters long.

     PERSONAL-NAME         Specifies  a  name  other  than  the  user's
                           offical  accounting  name  (see  NAME).  The
                           personal name, if available, is  printed  on
                           the  banner  page(s)  of  a  user's  spooled
                           output.  This is an unprivilged entry  in  a
                           profile,  and as such may be modified by the
                           user.

     PPN                   Specifies the  user's  [project,  programmer
                           number].  The [P,PN] is the primary means of
                           identifying a user.

     PRIVILEGES            Specifies the privileged  functions  allowed
                           to   the  user.   The  privileged  functions
                           are:  CPU,  DISK-PRIORITY,   ENQ-DEQ,   HPQ,
                           IPCF,  LOCK, METER, MON-SPY, OPERATOR, POKE,
                           RTTRP, SPY, TRPSET, UNSPOOL

     PROGRAM-TO-RUN        Specifies  the  file  specification  of  the
                           program to run after LOGIN is complete.  The
                           file  specification  may  include  a  device
                           name,    program    name,   extension,   and
                           directory, including up to  five  levels  of
                           sub-file directories (SFD).

     PROHIBIT              Enables the system administrator to  prevent
                           users  from  changing their passwords.  This
                           is useful in situations where several people
                           share a single PPN.
|  
|    QUIT                  Terminates  the  current  user-mode  command
|                          without executing that command.

     REQUIREMENTS          Specifies additional  information  the  user
                           must supply when logging in.  Options are:

                            o  ACCOUNT-STRING  information   associated
                               with the user
|  
|                           o  INTERVAL maximum time  between  password
|                              changes
|  
|                           o  LENGTH minimum characters for password

                            o  NAME under timesharing or batch




                                   11-17
                            o  PASSWORD under timesharing or batch
|  
|                           o  PROHIBIT password changes

                            o  REMARK to be stored in the usage files

     RESTORE               Deletes any  changes  you  have  made  to  a
                           profile  in  the  current user-mode session,
                           and returns all attributes to their original
                           values.

     SCHEDULER-TYPE        Associates the specified user profile with a
                           group  that  has  been  assigned a scheduler
                           class.   (See  Appendix  C  for  information
                           about assigning scheduler classes.)

     SHOW                  Displays  the   current   fields   for   the
                           specified user profile.

     SPOOLED-DEVICES       Specifies the physical devices not  normally
                           available to the user.  The options are CDP,
                           CDR, LPT, PTP, PLT and ALL.

     STRUCTURE-QUOTAS      Specifies the structure on  which  the  user
                           has  disk space allocated, and the amount of
                           disk  space  allocated  on  the   structure.
                           LOGIN  puts  these  structures in the user's
                           search  list,  and  sets   either   of   the
                           following two I/O status bits:  READ-ONLY or
                           NO-CREATE.

     WATCH-BITS            Specifies any of the  following  watch  bits
                           that  LOGIN  sets:    CONTEXTS,  DAY, FILES,
                           MTA, READ, RUN, VERSION, WAIT,  WRITE.   For
                           more  information, see the SET WATCH command
                           in the  TOPS-10  Operating  System  Commands
                           Manual.




















                                   11-18











                                 CHAPTER 12

                    CREATING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION FILES



   There are several files that the monitor can use to help start up  the
   system,  initiate  terminal  communication, and provide information to
   the user.  The files can be created by the  system  adminstrator.   If
   they  exist,  the INITIA program reads them and passes the information
   stored in them to the monitor.  The files INITIA can read are:

|       Filename                When
|  
|       SYS:SYSJOB.INI          system startup
|       SYS:INITIA.TXT          the TEXT option is specified
|       SYS:NOTICE.TXT          the NOTICE option is specified
|       ALL:STR.TXT[1,4]        the STRUCTURES option is specified
|       SYS:TTY.INI             a terminal requests connection
|       DSK:SWITCH.INI[p,pn]    you log in
|       HLP:INITIA.HLP          HELP is requested
|  
|  Users can also run INITIA from their  terminals  to  set  up  terminal
|  characteristics  and  display  information  about  the  terminal.  The
|  command options that direct INITIA to read these files are  listed  in
|  Table 12-1, Special Processing Commands.



   12.1  INITIA AT SYSTEM STARTUP

   INITIA runs automatically at system startup.  At  system  startup,  it
   reads  SYS:SYSJOB.INI,  an optional system startup file created by the
   system  administrator.   You   can   prevent   INITIA   from   running
   automatically  at  startup  by  using the NO INITIA startup option, as
   described in Appendix A.  SYSJOB.INI contains the  commands  necessary
   to  start  up  system  programs  that normally run in a detached state
   (that is, programs that do not normally require terminal  I/O).   Some
   of the system programs that may be started from SYSJOB.INI are ACTDAE,
   FILDAE, and QUASAR.

   SYSJOB.INI  allows  you  to  start  system  components   quickly   and
   automatically.  Most of the programs that can be started automatically


                                    12-1
   by OPSER, from the OPR.ATO  file,  can  be  started  more  easily  and
   efficiently  by  INITIA  through  SYSJOB.INI.   SYSJOB.INI can contain
   monitor commands and commands to programs, but its intended purpose is
   as  a  system  initialization  file, and great care should be taken to
   ensure that the file can be read successfully.

   INITIA also runs automatically whenever a  terminal  connects  to  the
|  system.   INITIA  reads  the file SYS:TTY.INI to establish information
|  about the terminal.  TTY.INI can also contain commands  to  INITIA  to
|  interrogate  the  connecting terminal to determine its characteristics
|  and attributes.

                                    NOTE

           INITIA cannot access files that are protected from it.
           Therefore,  the  system  files  SYSJOB.INI and TTY.INI
           must have a  protection  code  of  <155>.   Protection
           codes are described in detail in the TOPS-10 Operating
           System Commands Manual.




   12.1.1  The SYSJOB.INI File

   If it exists, SYS:SYSJOB.INI is read  by  INITIA  at  system  startup.
   TOPS-10 provides several system programs that are suitable for startup
   by INITIA from SYSJOB.INI.   System  programs  commonly  started  from
|  SYSJOB.INI  are the system DAEMON programs DAEMON, FILDAE, ACTDAE; the
|  GALAXY component QUASAR; user utilities such as MIC; and site-specific
   system  programs.  Any system program that normally runs in a detached
   state is a candidate for startup from SYSJOB.INI.

   INITIA reads SYSJOB.INI and sends the commands contained in it to  the
   monitor   for  special  processing  through  the  FRCLIN  (force-line)
   mechanism.  FRCLIN is an internal mechanism of the monitor that allows
   a  privileged  program  to  pass commands to the monitor as though the
   commands had been issued from a terminal.  INITIA uses FRCLIN to start
   system  programs because terminal input is handled by the monitor with
   a minimum of delay.  After INITIA is finished, FRCLIN is free for  use
   by other system components that must send commands to programs.

   System programs that may be started from SYSJOB.INI detect the  FRCLIN
   mechanism  and  detach  themselves automatically.  To detect FRCLIN, a
   program must compare the number of the terminal  line  that  sent  the
   startup  command  with  Word 162 (%CNFLN) of GETTAB Table 11 (.GTCNF),
   where the FRCLIN line number is stored.

   The FRCLIN mechanism ignores output from the programs that are started
   with  FRCLIN, and for that reason it may be difficult to determine why
   SYSJOB.INI fails to complete.  To detect the reason for  an  error  in
   SYSJOB.INI, set the DF.WFL bit in the monitor debugging word (DEBUGF),
   and restart INITIA.  Output from the programs that  are  started  will
   then be printed on the CTY.



                                    12-2
   12.1.1.1  Format of SYSJOB.INI -

   SYSJOB.INI is formatted as a list of the commands  that  can  be  sent
   through  FRCLIN to the monitor.  Any monitor commands can be placed in
   SYSJOB.INI, but the following are the most commonly used:

        SET DEFAULT ACCOUNT string    Sets a default  account  string  by
                                      which  the  jobs  on  FRCLIN can be
                                      logged in.

        LOGIN                         Logs in a  job  through  FRCLIN  to
                                      accommodate  the  program  that  is
                                      started on the  next  line  of  the
                                      file.

   This command does not actually run the LOGIN program or use the  LOGIN
   UUO.  The monitor performs special logging-in actions to prepare a job
   for the program.  The jobs  are  logged  in  under  the  PPN [1,2]  by
   default.

   It is possible to log in programs with a PPN other than  [1,2].   This
   may be accomplished by omitting the LOGIN command, and by specifically
   omitting the R or RUN command.  The program will then be  run  from  a
   job  that  is  not  logged  in,  using  PPN  [2,5].   The  program  is
   responsible for logging itself in, if desired, by using the LOGIN  UUO
   and any PPN that is valid.

        program                       Specifies  the  name  of  a  system
                                      program to run.

   Each program name is placed on a line following a LOGIN command.   The
   program is assumed to be run from SYS.  Therefore, the command

        BATCON

   is actually interpreted as the command

        R BATCON

   The actual monitor command R or RUN may be  included  in  the  command
   line.

   The following is an example of a SYS:SYSJOB.INI file:

        SET DEFAULT ACCOUNT MUMBLE    ;set the account string as "MUMBLE"
        LOG                           ;log in a SYSJOB
        ACTDAE                        ;run the accounting daemon
        LOG
        DAEMON                        ;run SYS:DAEMON
        LOG
        FILDAE                        ;run SYS:FILDAE
        LOG
        QUASAR                        ;run SYS:QUASAR
        .
        .


                                    12-3
        .
        NIK/DETACH                    ;run a local  program  in  detached
        LOG                           ;mode
        SET HPQ 1                     ;set a high priority run queue  for
        R MIC                         ;start MIC
        .

   To insure that input  from  other  FRCLIN  users  does  not  interrupt
   logically  related groups of commands in SYSJOB.INI, INITIA groups the
   SYSJOB.INI commands into strings delimited  by  LOGIN  commands.   For
   example,  the  following list shows commands contained in a SYSJOB.INI
   file:

        LOGIN
        ACTDAE
        LOGIN
        SET HPQ 1
        DAEMON

   INITIA groups the above commands into two strings.  INITIA copies  the
   first  string  into  FRCLIN's input buffer.  The first string contains
   the following commands:

        LOGIN<CR>ACTDAE<CR>

   Then it copies the the second string into FRCLIN's input buffer.   The
   second string contains the following commands:

        LOGIN<CR>SET HPQ 1<CR>DAEMON<CR>

                                    NOTE

           INITIA considers any program name given in  SYSJOB.INI
           that  starts  with  "LOG" to be a LOGIN command.  This
           does not affect the content of the input, but  it  may
           cause conflicts, which the above technique attempts to
           prevent.  To differentiate between LOGIN commands  and
           other  program  names that begin with the letters LOG,
           use the following format:

                R LOG...


   If errors occur during processing, the rest of the input file may  not
   be  executed.   Therefore,  the order of the commands in SYSJOB.INI is
   vital to successful system startup.  It is important to place  monitor
   components  first  in  the file, followed by CUSPS and other programs.
   You should place ACTDAE first in the file, to ensure  that  accounting
   is enabled when the rest of the programs are started.  You may include
   commands to the programs you are starting.  If you  include  commands,
   you  must  explicitly  detach  the  program  after the commands if the
   program does not detach itself as a result of the commands.





                                    12-4
   12.1.2  The TTY.INI File

   Before a user can log in, the terminal must be logically connected  to
   the  system.   When  a  terminal requests connection, INITIA reads the
|  file SYS:TTY.INI to set up terminal and job characteristics.   TTY.INI
|  can contain commands to INITIA to:
|  
|        o  Interrogate  the  connecting  terminal   to   determine   its
|           characteristics and attributes.
|  
|        o  Set terminal characteristics by explicit command.
|  
|        o  Set options that specify information to  be  associated  with
|           the terminal.
|  
|  
|                                   NOTE
|  
|          If you specified ONCE startup option NO INITIA,  users
|          must  issue  either  the INITIA CHECK command or SETTY
|          command to activate the options in TTY.INI.




   12.1.2.1  Format of TTY.INI -

   Each command line of TTY.INI, except continued lines, must begin  with
   one  of  the terminal identifiers listed in the table below.  By using
   the terminal identifiers in combination with  the  options  listed  in
   Section  12.1.4  you  can specify any number of terminals in a command
   line, and you may use any number of options  for  each  terminal.   If
   conflicting  options  are  specified  for  a single terminal, the last
   option in the command line for that terminal takes effect.

   To continue a command line, put a hyphen (-) as the last character  of
   the  line  that  is to be continued.  To insert a comment, precede the
   comment by a semicolon (;) or an exclamation  point  (!).   File  line
   numbers  are  ignored.   Multiple  tabs  and spaces are treated as one
   space.

|  The following is an example of a SYS:TTY.INI file:
|  
|     ALL:                        CHECK NORUN KSYS XONXOFF TEXT NOGAG LC-
|                                 REMOTE
|     APC:CTERM                   NOCHECK
|     STOMP                       ACCOUNT "MUMBLE"
|     CONNECT                     COMET_TTY0
|     KL1026_TTY405               NO REMOTE NO TABS
|     KL1026_TTY406               NO REMOTE NO TABS
|     KL1026_TTY407               NO REMOTE NO TABS
|     CTY:            TYPE:LA120  NO REMOTE NO TABS GALOPR ACCOUNT-
|                                 "MUMBLE"
|     KL1026_TTY5                 RCV:9600 XMT:9600 NO REMOTE
|     KL1026_TTY6                 RCV:300 XMT:300 REMOTE


                                    12-5
|     KL1026_TTY405  TYPE:LA120   ;CPU2 CTY
|     KL1026_TTY406  TYPE:LA120   ;CPU1 CTY
|     KL1026_TTY407  TYPE:LA120   ;CPU0 CTY (when not THE CTY)
|     .
|     .
|     .



   12.1.2.2  Specifying Terminal Lines -

   The following commands identify a terminal or set of terminals.   This
   identifier  is  placed  first  in  the  command  line, followed by the
   options that are listed in the next section.

        Identifier            Terminal Lines Indicated

        ALL:                  All terminal lines.

|       APC:x                 Asynchronous  Port   Characteristic.    All
|                             terminals  of  APC  type  x  where  'x'  is
|                             determined  by   certain   attributes   and
|                             characteristics.   This  identifier  can be
|                             one of the following:
|  
|                               unknown
|                               hardwired
|                               dataset
|                               Gandalf
|                               TSN
|                               autodial
|                               Micom
|                               NRT (Network Remote Terminal)
|                               LAT (Local Area Terminal)
|                               CTERM (Command Terminal)

        CTY:                  The CTY (controlling terminal) only.

        DETECT n              Dataset lines that are set to n baud.

        LINSPD n              Lines that are set to n baud.

        node_identifier       Terminal at the  node  called  "node."  The
                              identifier  following  node_  can be any of
                              the identifiers in this list.

        OTHER                 Any terminals not  specified  with  a  TTY:
                              identifier.

        OTHSPD n              All lines not set to n baud.

        TTYnnn:               Terminal line nnn.  This identifier can  be
                              abbreviated to TTnnn:.

        TTYnnn-zzz:           All terminal lines from nnn to  zzz.   This


                                    12-6
                              identifier    can    be    abbreviated   to
                              TTnnn-zzz:.

        (TTYaaa:, TTYbbb:,...,TTYzzz:)
                              All terminal lines listed.

   Terminal line numbers range from 0-777  octal.   Hard-wired  terminals
   are  assigned  permanent  terminal  line  numbers in the form TTYnnn:,
   where 'nnn' is the physical line number.  For example, if the terminal
   number  TTY10:   is  assigned  to  a terminal that is hardwired to the
   system, that number will not change.  If  the  host  system  is  named
   MING, this terminal may also be referred to as MING_10.

   Terminals connected through nodes have permanent line numbers  in  the
   form  nnn_lll, where 'nnn' is the node name or number and 'lll' is the
   number of the line that connects the terminal to the node.   When  one
   of these remotely-connected terminals is recognized by the system, the
   monitor assigns a "terminal name" to it, in the  form  TTYnnn:,  where
   'nnn'  is  a  temporary  number assigned during the connection.  These
   terminal names  are  reassigned  on  a  dynamic  basis,  as  terminals
   logically connect and disconnect from the system.

   For  example,  terminal  line  15  on  node  number  44,  a   terminal
   concentrator with node name XENON, would be called 44_15, or XENON_15,
   and this designation will not change.  However, when terminal 44_15 is
   connected to the host system, it may be assigned terminal name TTY130:
   by the monitor.  The terminal will be known to the monitor as  TTY130:
   as  long  as it remains connected to the host system.  If the terminal
   becomes disconnected and then reconnected,  it  might  be  assigned  a
   different terminal name, such as TTY52:.



   12.1.2.3  Specifying Terminal Options -

   Terminal identifiers are followed by options that specify  information
   to  be  associated with the terminal(s) identified at the beginning of
   the command line.

   There are three types of options:

         o  Commands that specify special processing by INITIA.

         o  Terminal characteristics to be set for the terminal  when  it
            is connected.

         o  Programs to run automatically when the terminal is connected.

   The options are separated by commas or spaces.  For those options that
   require  an  argument,  the argument can immediately follow the option
   name, or it can be separated from the option name  by  a  colon  or  a
   space.   Option  names can be abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation
   is unique.

   In conflicting situations, the option specified last  in  the  command


                                    12-7
   line takes precedence over those specified earlier.  You can turn many
   options off by typing NO before the option word, with  or  without  an
   intervening  space.   A  minus  sign has the same effect as NO.  Thus,
   NO GAG, NOGAG, and -GAG have the same effect.  In the table below, the
   complement  of  the  command  is shown, if a complement is valid.  The
   default setting of the options is designated by (*).


   The  following  table  lists  TTY.INI  options  to  indicate   special
   processing to be done for the terminal at initialization:

   Table 12-1:  Special Processing Commands

     Option        Complement        Meaning

|    ATTRIBUTE                       Display terminal attributes.
|  
|    CHECK         NOCHECK(*)        Interrogate terminal to  determine
|    CHECK:default                   its class, model,  and  type,  and
|                                    set     the     attributes     and
|                                    characteristics  associated   with
|                                    the  class, model, and type found.
|                                    When CHECK:default  is  specified,
|                                    INITIA    interrogates   only   if
|                                    current terminal type matches  the
|                                    system  default  type specified in
|                                    MONGEN Question 132.

     CONNECT          --             Connect networked terminal to  the
                                     host.

|    HELP             --             Read the file  HLP:INITIA.HLP  and
|                                    print information about the INITIA
|                                    command.

     KSYS          NOKSYS(*)         Display KSYS time if it  has  been
                                     set.

     LOCATE node                     Make a logical connection with the
                                     specified  node,  similar  to  the
                                     monitor LOCATE command.

     NAME(*)       NONAME            Print the system name.

     NORUN            --             Suppress the running  of  programs
                                     that  are set to run automatically
                                     for the terminal.

     NOTICE        NONOTICE(*)       Print SYS:NOTICE.TXT,  if  such  a
                                     file exists.

     SETTTY        NOSETTTY          Set terminal from TTY.INI (on CTY)
                                     or  SWITCH.INI.   If  the  job  is
                                     logged   in,   NOSETTTY   is   the
                                     default.    For  more  information


                                    12-8
                                     about SETTTY and  SETTTY  options,
                                     see  the  TOPS-10 Operating System
                                     Commands Manual.

     STOMP            --             Initiate  the  "terminal  stomper"
                                     function that disconnects terminal
                                     lines that have been detached  and
                                     idle for two or more minutes.

     STRUCTURES    NOSTRUCTURES(*)   Print individual  structure  notes
                                     from ALL:STR.TXT[1,4].

     TEXT          NOTEXT(*)         Print SYS:INITIA.TXT,  if  such  a
                                     file exists.

     TTY           NOTTY(*)          Display all terminal settings  for
                                     this terminal.

|    TTY:TTYnnn                      Display all terminal settings  for
|                                    TTYnnn.
|  
|  
|  The following programs start automatically when INITIA  runs  for  the
|  terminal.  A job is logged in for the program and INITIA creates a PPN
|  for the job.  Unless specified otherwise, INITIA  constructs  PPNs  as
|  follows:
|  
|        o  If the terminal is a local terminal, INITIA uses [1,2].
|  
|        o  If the terminal is remote, INITIA constructs a PPN using  the
|           algorithm  [100+node-number,2].   For  example, a terminal at
|           the node that has node number 12 receives the PPN [112,2].
|  
|           INITIA creates a job search list for the job, which it copies
|           from the current setting of the system search list.
|  
|  
|  Table 12-2:  Options to Run Programs
|  
|  
|       Option         Program
|  
|       AUTOMATIC      Start OPSER  and  begin  processing  an  automatic
|                      startup  file.  The file name that is read depends
|                      on the terminal from which OPSER was started.
|  
|                      When the terminal is  connected  directly  to  the
|                      local system:
|  
|                       o  If device OPR:, OPR.ATO is used.
|  
|                       o  Otherwise, TTYnnn.ATO is used, where 'nnn'  is
|                          the terminal line number.
|  
|                      When the terminal is connected to a remote node:


                                    12-9
|                       o  If device  OPR:,  OPRnnn.ATO  is  used,  where
|                          'nnn' is the node number.
|  
|                       o  Otherwise, nnnlll.ATO is used, where 'nnn'  is
|                          the node number and 'lll' is the terminal line
|                          number.
|  
|  
|       CHKPNT         Start CHKPNT under [1,2].  This program cannot  be
|                      run from a remote terminal.
|  
|       CRASH          Start FILEX under [10,1].
|  
|       DAEMON         Start DAEMON under [1,2].  This program cannot  be
|                      run from a remote terminal.
|  
|       GALOPR         Start the OPR program, which begins processing the
|                      file SYS:SYSTEM.CMD, if the terminal is local.  If
|                      the terminal is remote,  SYS:nnnlll.CMD  is  used,
|                      where  'nnn'  is  the node number and 'lll' is the
|                      line number of the terminal where OPR is started.
|  
|       OMOUNT         Start OMOUNT under [1,2].  This program cannot  be
|                      run from a remote terminal.
|  
|       OPSER          Start OPSER.
|  
|       STOMP          Initiate the "terminal  stomper"  function,  which
|                      disconnects terminal lines that have been detached
|                      and idle for longer than two minutes.
|  
|       SYSDPY         Start  the  SYSDPY   display   program   for   the
|                      appropriate terminal type.




   12.1.2.4  Associated (Error) Messages -

   If there are errors in the TTY.INI file, INITIA prints:

        ?INTCER INITIA COMMAND ERROR

   Correct the TTY.INI file and restart INITIA for the  job.   Any  other
   ?INT...  error message indicates a serious system problem that must be
   investigated by a software specialist.



   12.1.3  The INITIA Monitor Command

   The INITIA monitor command enables users to initialize their terminals
   at  any  time.   To run INITIA from a terminal, use the INITIA monitor
   command.  You may include  the  INITIA  command  and  your  choice  of
   options in your SWITCH.INI file.


                                   12-10
   You can use INITIA to do the following:
|  
|        o  Display terminal attribute settings, mode settings, and check
|           terminal type.
|  
|        o  Display the system banner and time of system shutdown (KSYS),
|           if any.
|  
|        o  Display general system notices.
|  
|        o  Display operator notes about mounted structures.
|  
|        o  Change terminal characteristics.
|  
   See the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual for more  information
   about the INITIA command and the SWITCH.INI file.









































                                   12-11
                     PART 5: SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION




             This part contains four appendixes.  Appendixes  A
             though D describe alternatives to the installation
             procedure  and  information  for   modifying   the
             monitor software.











                                 APPENDIX A

                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS



|  ONCE runs automatically at system startup.   At  system  startup,  the
|  initial  dialog questions allow you to provide a reason for the system
|  reload and to specify the date and time.  While the system is  up  and
|  running,  ONCE  may  also  be run in user mode by running the monitor.
|  You may refresh disks and change disk parameters  when  ONCE  runs  at
|  system startup, or you may run ONCE in user mode without reloading the
|  system.
|  
|  ONCE performs the following functions:
|  
|        o  Checks memory for units that are offline and confirms the
|           state of the memory units by a response from you.
|  
|        o  Checks the HOME blocks on all the units for inconsistencies
|           and optionally rewrites the HOME blocks.  If any units are
|           write-protected, ONCE reports the unit name, asking whether
|           it should be write-enabled or write-protected.
|  
|        o  Reports on disk units that are offline.
|  
|        o  Checks the BAT blocks, listing any inconsistencies for each
|           unit.
|  
|        o  Lists the number of bad regions on any unit you specify.
|  
|        o  Lists each file structure and the units in the file structure
|           in their logical order.
|  
|        o  Lists all the disk units that are not in a file structure.
|  
|        o  Lists the units in the Active Swapping List.  For new
|           installations, there is no swapping list, and ONCE prints a
|           message to indicate that.
|  
|        o  Lists the structures in the System Search List, or SSL.




                                    A-1
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|        o  Lists the structures in the System Dump List, or SDL.
|  
|        o  Allows you to change parameters of any structure.
|  
|        o  Allows you to change parameters of any unit.
|  
|        o  Allows you to change any system disk parameters.
|  
|        o  Allows you to dissolve file structures, if any file
|           structures exist.
|  
|        o  Allows you to define file structures.
|  
|        o  Allows you to specify the units on which you want HOME blocks
|           rewritten.
|  
|        o  Lists the structures that need to be refreshed, and allows
|           you to specify the structures that you want refreshed.
|  
|        o  Allows you to log in as [1,2], after ONCE has refreshed
|           structures.
|  
|        o  Starts running the null job and begins timesharing.
|  
|  
|  The Disk Parameters Worksheet, Worksheet 3, is provided in  Chapter  2
|  to record the disk parameters for your system.  Because you can define
|  so many disk parameters with ONCE, you may find it  useful  to  record
|  the  disk  parameters for your system on the worksheet and to use this
|  as an aid when you refresh structures, create new file structures,  or
|  redefine disk parameters.
|  
|  
|  
|  A.1  ONCE AT SYSTEM STARTUP
|  
|  ONCE begins when you reload the system, as described in  Section  9.4.
|  First,  the  system name and the date that the monitor was created are
|  displayed.  The system name is set by Question 5 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN (see Chapter 9).
|  
|       [Loading from DSKM:RL336A.EXE[1,4]]
|  
|       RL336A DEC-10 Development 16-Feb-88
|  
|  ONCE scans memory to be sure that it is accessible.  Each  monitor  is
|  built  for a specific amount of memory.  MONGEN Question 58 allows you
|  to specify the amount of memory when you  are  building  the  monitor.
|  Therefore,  new  installations  may  receive  the  following  message,
|  indicating that the default monitor was built to  expect  more  memory
|  than that which is currently online:



                                    A-2
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       %Memory from xxxxxx to yyyyyy is offline
|       Set memory (DOWN,OFFLIN,ONLINE) [OFFLIN]:
|  
|  The default response  appears  in  square  brackets.   If  the  memory
|  indicated  is not needed at this time, but will be needed later, press
|  RETURN to accept the default answer.  Memory that is set  offline  can
|  be  set  online  during system operation, with the SET MEMORY command.
|  If all memory must be online, enter ONLINE and press RETURN.   If  the
|  memory  is  not  going  to  be  required  at all, enter DOWN and press
|  RETURN.  Memory that is down cannot be brought up with the SET  MEMORY
|  command.
|  
|  If you are starting an SMP system and have not yet started  the  other
|  CPUs, ONCE prints the following message:
|  
|       %CPU #nnnn is not running.  Set CPU status (DOWN,UP) [DOWN]:
|  
|  If you have an SMP system, you can start the CPU indicated by entering
|  UP  and  pressing  RETURN.   To  accept  the default value, just press
|  RETURN.  After  receiving  an  answer,  ONCE  asks  for  the  date  by
|  printing:
|  
|       Date:
|  
|  Enter the date in the form:
|  
|       DD-MMM-YY
|  or
|       MMM-DD-YY
|  
|  Where DD is the numerical day of the month (01 through 31), MMM is the
|  name  of the month (JANUARY through DECEMBER) abbreviated as the first
|  three letters of the month (JAN through DEC), and YY  is  replaced  by
|  the two digit year designation.  The year is optional.
|  
|  If you respond with an  incorrectly  formatted  date,  ONCE  asks  the
|  question again in more detail:
|  
|       Please type today's date as MMM-DD(-YY)
|  
|  If you specify a date before the  last  system  crash  or  before  the
|  creation date of the monitor, the ONCE dialog issues an error message,
|  supplies the last crash or creation date, and asks you to verify  your
|  response:
|  
|       %Specified date is prior to last crash.
|       Last crash date:MMM-DD-YY
|  or
|       %Specified date is prior to monitor creation date.
|       Creation date:MMM-DD-YY
|  and
|       Specified date:MMM-DD-YY


                                    A-3
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       Is this correct?  (Y or N)
|  
|  To which you can respond Y if the date you typed was correct, or N, if
|  you  typed  an  incorrect  date.  If you enter N, the Date:  prompt is
|  reprinted so that you can enter the correct date.
|  
|  ONCE asks for the time after it receives the date:
|  
|       Time:
|  
|  Enter the time based on a 24-hour clock.  The seconds are optional, as
|  are the colons separating the hours, minutes and seconds.
|  
|       HH:MM:SS
|  or
|       HHMMSS
|  
|  If the format of the time is  incorrect,  ONCE  prints  the  following
|  message:
|  
|       Please type time as HHMMSS or HH:MM:SS
|  
|  If you specify a time before the last system crash,  the  ONCE  dialog
|  issues an error message, supplies the last crash time, and asks you to
|  verify your response:
|  
|       %Specified time is prior to last crash.
|       Specified time:HH:MM:SS
|       Last crash time:HH:MM:SS
|  
|       Is this correct?  (Y or N)
|  
|  If you enter N, the Time:  prompt is reprinted so that you  can  enter
|  the correct time.
|  
|  As with the date, it is important that you  enter  the  correct  time.
|  The  system  date and time can be changed with the CHANGE DATE startup
|  option; the system time can be changed with the  SET  DAYTIME  monitor
|  command.   However,  changing  either  the  system date or time during
|  system operation may adversely affect  operation.   Therefore,  it  is
|  recommended  that  you  reload  the system if you find it necessary to
|  change them.
|  
|  After receiving the date and time, ONCE then asks the question:
|  
|       Why reload:
|  
|  This question is asked  whenever  the  system  is  reloaded.   Several
|  responses  are  allowed, depending on the reason for the reload.  When
|  you are installing the monitor, use one of the following answers:
|  
|       NEW       if you are installing a new system


                                    A-4
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       SCHED     if you are loading a new or different version of the
|                 monitor
|  
|  When you are reloading the system after a problem or crash, use one of
|  the following answers:
|  
|       HALT      if the system ended with a stopcode or HALT
|  
|       HARDWARE  if the system ended with a hardware malfunction
|  
|       HUNG      if the system would not respond
|  
|       LOOP      if the monitor was looping in executive mode
|  
|       NXM       if a non-existent memory stop occurred
|  
|       OPR       if an operator error occurred
|  
|       PARITY    if a memory parity error occurred
|  
|       POWER     if a power failure occurred
|  
|       STATIC    if static electricity caused the crash
|  
|  When you are bringing the system  up  after  a  scheduled  maintenance
|  session,  or  for  scheduled standalone time, use one of the following
|  answers:
|  
|       PM        for preventative maintenance
|  
|       CM        for corrective maintenance
|  
|       SA        for scheduled stand-alone time
|  
|  If none of the responses you see here apply, use the following:
|  
|       OTHER     followed by the reason for the reload
|  
|  You can include comments to further describe your reasons by preceding
|  the comment with a semicolon or a space.  Your answer to this question
|  is stored in the system error log file ERROR.SYS.
|  
|  The ONCE program now prompts for a startup option.
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  ONCE provides several startup options.  If you  press  RETURN  without
|  entering  a startup option, you will be provided with a simple list of
|  available options:
|  
|       Startup option:<RET>



                                    A-5
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       Options are:  CHANGE  DEFINE  DESTRO  DISSOL  GO  NOINIT
|                     REFRES  SHOW 
|  
|  If you type HELP and press RETURN you will be provided with a list  of
|  the startup options and switches and a brief explanation of each:
|  
|       Startup option:HELP<RET>
|  
|       Options are:
|       CHANGE  - Change system parameters
|       DEFINE  - Define structures and system lists
|       DESTRO  - Dissolve all structures in the system
|       DISSOL  - Dissolve a single structure
|       GO      - Start timesharing
|       NOINIT  - Start timesharing without system initialization
|       REFRES  - Refresh selected structures
|       SHOW    - Display system parameters
|  
|       Switches are:
|       NOASL   - Don't use reserved active swapping list
|       NOCOPY  - Don't start CRSCPY
|       NOPRIM  - Start timesharing in secondary protocol
|       NOSDL   - Don't use preserved system dump list
|       NOSSL   - Don't use preserved system search list
|       NOVALI  - Don't require account validation
|       STANDA  - Start timesharing with SCHED10 set
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  
|  
|  A.2  RUNNING ONCE IN USER MODE
|  
|  Running ONCE in user mode, by running the monitor, allows the operator
|  to  change  disk  parameters  without  reloading  the system.  To make
|  changes to the disk file system, you must be logged in as [1,2].
|  
|       .R monitor-name<RET>
|  
|       Use scratch file (NO,YES) [default]:
|  
|  The first question allows you to store the disk data base  in  a  .BIN
|  file.   The  use  of  the  scratch  file  provides the novice user the
|  opportunity to learn how to use ONCE without any chance of file system
|  damage.   If you are not logged in as [1,2], the default answer is YES
|  and you must accept the default answer.  If you are not logged  in  as
|  [1,2] and you answer NO, you will be returned to monitor level:
|  
|       ?  Must be [1,2]
|       .
|  
|  If you are logged in as  [1,2]  the  default  is  NO.   Normally,  you


                                    A-6
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  respond  to  this question by pressing RETURN.  Then, you are prompted
|  for units to read:
|  
|       Read units:
|  
|  Specify the name of each disk  unit  you  wish  to  change  and  press
|  RETURN.   Your entry specifies the units from which ONCE will read the
|  home blocks.  You may specify a single unit, or ALL.   When  you  have
|  specified all the units to read, press RETURN.
|  
|       Write units:
|  
|  Specify the disk units on which to write new HOME blocks  for  changed
|  information.  The ONCE program ensures that you will not inadvertently
|  disrupt system operation by  not  allowing  you  to  change  the  disk
|  parameters for disks that you did not specify as 'Write units'.
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  If you press RETURN without entering a startup  option,  you  will  be
|  provided with a simple list of available options:
|  
|       Startup option:<RET>
|  
|       Options are:  CHANGE  DEFINE  DISSOL  EXIT  REFRES  SHOW
|  
|  If you type HELP and press RETURN you will be provided with a list  of
|  the startup options and switches and a brief explanation of each:
|  
|       Startup option:HELP<RET>
|  
|       Options are:
|       CHANGE  - Change system parameters
|       DEFINE  - Define structures and system lists
|       DISSOL  - Dissolve a single structure
|       EXIT    - Return to monitor level
|       REFRES  - Refresh selected structures
|       SHOW    - Display system parameters
|  
|       Switches are:
|       NOERRO  - Re-write HOM blocks despite errors
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3  STARTUP OPTIONS AND SWITCHES
|  
|  ONCE allows you to change many disk and search  list  parameters,  and
|  performs  disk  refreshing and restructuring for maintenance purposes.
|  Certain startup options, startup option  keywords,  and  switches  are
|  valid  only  when ONCE runs at system startup (executive mode); others


                                    A-7
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  are valid only when running ONCE in user mode.  In following sections,
|  each  startup  option  is  described  and  an  example  of  its use is
|  provided.
|  
|  When you select a startup option, the  keywords  applicable  for  that
|  option  are  listed  after the option in parentheses.  For example, if
|  you select the DEFINE startup option,  the  keywords  valid  for  this
|  option are listed after the option, in parentheses:
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE<RET>
|       Define (ASL,SDL,SSL,STRUCT):
|  
|  If you are already familiar with the keywords available for a specific
|  startup option, you may type the startup option and the keyword on the
|  same line:
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE ASL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of units...
|  
|  If you press RETURN without selecting a keyword you will be  asked  to
|  specify a startup option again:
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE<RET>
|       Define (ASL,SDL,SSL,STRUCT):<RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  The startup options and keywords, and the  modes  in  which  they  are
|  available,  are listed and explained below.  E denotes executive mode,
|  and U denotes user mode.
|  
|  Option       Mode        Effect
|  
|  CHANGE       E,U         Use this option to  change  disk  parameters.
|                      If  you choose the CHANGE startup option when ONCE
|                      runs at system startup, the LOGIN command requires
|                      a PPN and password before you can log in a job.
|  
|                      Mode Valid Keywords
|  
|                      E,U  ASL
|                      E    DATE
|                      E    NETWORk
|                      E,U  SDL
|                      E,U  SETS
|                      E,U  SSL
|                      E,U  STRUCTure
|                      E,U  UNIT
|  
|                      Section A.3.1 describes the CHANGE startup option.



                                    A-8
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  DEFINE       E,U         Use this  option  to  define  structures  and
|                      system  lists.   If  you choose the DEFINE startup
|                      option when ONCE runs at system startup, the LOGIN
|                      command requires a PPN and password before you can
|                      log in a job.
|  
|                      Mode Valid keywords
|  
|                      E,U  ASL
|                      E,U  SDL
|                      E,U  SSL
|                      E,U  STRUCTure.
|  
|                      Section A.3.2 describes the DEFINE startup option.
|  
|  DESTROY      E           Use this option with  extreme  caution.   The
|                      DESTROY  option  is used to refresh all structures
|                      and rewrite all HOME blocks.  If  you  choose  the
|                      DESTROY  startup option, ONCE prints the following
|                      message on the CTY:
|  
|                        To automatically log-in under [1,2] type "LOGIN"
|  
|                      Then you can log in a job under the PPN  [1,2]  by
|                      simply typing LOGIN to the monitor prompt.
|  
|                      Section  A.3.3  describes  the   DESTROY   startup
|                      option.
|  
|  DISSOLVE     E,U         Use  this  option  to   dissolve   a   single
|                      specified file structure.
|  
|                      Section  A.3.4  describes  the  DISSOLVE   startup
|                      option.
|  
|  EXIT         U           Use this option to return to monitor level.
|  
|                      Section A.3.5 describes the EXIT startup option.
|  
|  REFRESH      E,U         Use this option to refresh a single specified
|                      file structure.  If you choose the REFRESH startup
|                      option, ONCE prints the following message  on  the
|                      CTY:
|  
|                        To automatically log-in under [1,2] type "LOGIN"
|  
|                      Then you can log in a job under the PPN  [1,2]  by
|                      simply typing LOGIN to the monitor prompt.
|  
|                      Section  A.3.6  describes  the   REFRESH   startup
|                      option.



                                    A-9
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  SHOW         E,U         Use this option to display system parameters.
|  
|                      Mode Valid keywords
|  
|                      E,U  ASL
|                      E    DATE
|                      E,U  NETWORk
|                      E,U  SDL
|                      E,U  SETS
|                      E,U  SSL
|                      E,U  STRUCTure
|                      E,U  UNIT
|  
|                      Section A.3.7 describes the SHOW option.
|  
|  GO           E           Use this option to start the monitor  without
|                      any checking or dialog.
|  
|                      Section A.3.8 describes the GO option.
|  
|  NOINITIA     E           Use this option to start the monitor  without
|                      initializing  terminal  lines.   Because  terminal
|                      lines are not initialized, this option  should  be
|                      used only when running the system stand-alone.
|  
|                      Section A.3.9 describes the NOINITIA option.
|  
|  The startup option can be followed by a number of switches to  control
|  the  type  of  output to the CTY.  The switches available in each mode
|  are listed and explained below:
|  
|  Switch       Mode   Effect
|  
|  /NOASL       E      Use this switch to force the  monitor  to  rebuild
|                      the Active Swapping List from disk after a reload.
|                      If you do not specify  this  switch,  the  monitor
|                      first  tries  to  use  the  preserved  copy in the
|                      Active Swapping List.  If the monitor  cannot  use
|                      the preserved data, then it rebuilds the data from
|                      disk.
|  
|  /NOCOPY      E      Use this switch to prevent  CRSCPY  from  starting
|                      automatically  when  the  monitor  is  started up.
|                      When a continuable stopcode occurs, CRSCPY  copies
|                      the  current  crash  file  (SYS:CRASH.EXE)  into a
|                      backup file in the XPN area.
|  
|  /NOERRO      U      Use this switch to force the  monitor  to  rewrite
|                      the HOME blocks.
|  
|  /NOPRIMARY   E      Use this switch to start timesharing in  secondary
|                      protocol.  This switch is valid for KL10s only.


                                    A-10
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  /NOSDL       E      Use this switch to force the  monitor  to  rebuild
|                      the System Dump List from disk after a reload.  If
|                      you do not specify this switch, the monitor  first
|                      tries to use the preserved copy in the System Dump
|                      List.  If the monitor  cannot  use  the  preserved
|                      data, then it rebuilds the data from disk.
|  
|  /NOSSL       E      Use this switch to force the  monitor  to  rebuild
|                      the  System  Search List from disk after a reload.
|                      If you do not specify  this  switch,  the  monitor
|                      first  tries  to  use  the  preserved  copy in the
|                      System Search List.  If the monitor cannot use the
|                      preserved  data,  then  it  rebuilds the data from
|                      disk.
|  
|  /NOVALIDATE  E      Use this switch to turn off account validation.
|  
|  /STANDALONE  E      Use this switch to  bring  up  the  monitor  as  a
|                      stand-alone system.
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.1  CHANGing System Parameters
|  
|  This section describes the CHANGE startup option.  You must DEFINE the
|  system lists and structures before you can CHANGE them.  Section A.3.2
|  describes  the  DEFINE  startup  option  and   provides   a   complete
|  description  of  the  parameters  that must be defined before they are
|  changed.
|  
|  In the following examples,  the  CHANGE  startup  option  is  selected
|  first,  followed  by  the  item  to change.  The text that you type is
|  underlined.
|  
|  To CHANGE the Active Swapping List (E,U):
|  
|  Enter the names of the units in the Active Swapping  List.   Enter  an
|  extra RETURN when the list is complete.
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE ASL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of units to appear in the active swapping list, one
|       per line.  Terminate list with a blank line.
|       RXxn<RET>
|       <RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To CHANGE the date (E):
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE DATE<RET>
|       Date:dd-mmm-yy<RET>


                                    A-11
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       Time:hh:mm:ss<RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To CHANGE network information (E):
|  
|  The network information is  initially  provided  by  your  answers  to
|  several  questions  in  the  MONGEN  dialog.   The  appropriate MONGEN
|  question numbers are shown next to the corresponding questions in  the
|  example below:
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE NETWORK<RET>    (MONGEN Question  )
|  
|       System wide node name [name]:name<RET>              ( 90)
|       ANF-10 node name [name]:name<RET>                   ( 92)
|       ANF-10 node number (1 - 77) [nn]:nn<RET>            ( 94)
|       Decnet node name [node name]:name<RET>              (107)
|       DECnet area number (1 - 36) [nn]:nn<RET>            (108)
|       DECnet node number (1 - 1023) [nnnn]:nnnn<RET>      (109)
|       LAT service name [name]:name<RET>                   (114)
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To CHANGE the System Dump List (E,U):
|  
|  Enter the names of the structures in the System Dump List.   Enter  an
|  extra RETURN when the list is complete.
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE SDL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of structures to appear in the system dump list, one
|       per line.  Terminate list with a blank line.
|       DSKx<RET>
|       <RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To CHANGE disk-set numbers (E,U):
|  
|  Disk-set numbers are assigned  within  the  DEFINE  STRUCTure  startup
|  option,  and  may  also be changed within the CHANGE STRUCTure startup
|  option.
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE SETS<RET>
|  
|       Enter the desired disk-set numbers (1 - 36) or "ALL" for all
|       disk-sets, one per line.  Terminate with a blank line.
|       ALL<RET>
|       <RET>
|  
|       Startup Option:



                                    A-12
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  To CHANGE the System Search List (E,U):
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE SSL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of structures to appear in the system search list,
|       one per line.  Terminate list with a blank line.
|       DSKx<RET>
|       <RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To CHANGE STRUCTure parameters (E,U):
|  
|  The CHANGE STRUCTure startup option is used to change  the  parameters
|  of  an  existing  file  structure.   You  can specify one structure to
|  change only its parameters, or ALL to change all the structures.
|  
|  In the questions that follow, any question preceded with  an  asterisk
|  indicates  changing  that  parameter  will require the structure to be
|  refreshed.  A range of acceptable values, if applicable,  is  enclosed
|  in  parentheses.   A  default  value,  if  any,  is enclosed in square
|  brackets.  The ranges of acceptable values are calculated according to
|  the  structure  type  previously defined.  The default values provided
|  are those values  which  were  previously  defined.   All  ranges  and
|  default values used in the following example are used for illustration
|  only.  To accept a default value, just press RETURN.
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE STRUCT<RET>
|       Structure to change:DSKx<RET>
|  
|       Change unit parameters for this structure (NO,YES) [NO]:
|       Do you want to see the BAT blocks (NO,YES) [NO]:
|       Parameters for structure DSKx
|           Structure name [DSKx]:
|          *Blocks per cluster (3 - 131071) [5]:
|           Private structure (NO,YES) [NO]:
|           Owner PPN (NONE,[p,pn]) [NONE]:
|           Disk-set (1 - 36,ALL,NONE) [ALL]:
|          *Number of K for CRASH.EXE (0 - 4096) [2048]:
|           Blocks allowed for overdraw per user (0 - 307800) [500]:
|           Consecutive blocks tried for on output (0 - 262143) [30]:
|          *Bits per cluster count (0 - 18) [12]:
|  
|       Structure to change:
|  
|  When you have finished changing one or all structures, you  may  enter
|  another  stucture  to  CHANGE.  If you wish to be prompted for another
|  startup option, press RETURN.
|  
|  To CHANGE Unit paramters (E,U):
|  
|  The CHANGE UNIT startup option is used to change the  unit  parameters


                                    A-13
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  of an existing file structure.
|  
|  Enter a unit to change  and  press  RETURN.   A  range  of  acceptable
|  values,  if  applicable, is enclosed in parentheses.  A default value,
|  if any, is enclosed in square brackets.  To accept  a  default  value,
|  just press RETURN.
|  
|       Startup option:CHANGE UNIT<RET>
|  
|       Any question preceeded with an asterisk indicates changing that
|       parameter will require the structure to be refreshed.
|  
|       Unit to change:RXxn<RET>
|       Parameters for unit RXxn
|           Unit ID [XXXXn]:
|          *SAT blocks per unit (5 - 81) [5]:
|           SAT blocks in core (1 - 5) [5]:
|          *K for swapping (0 - 21625) [20000]:
|          *First logical block for swapping (1400 - 705504) [352752]:
|           Swapping class (0 - 1) [0]:
|           Make this the only unit in the ASL (NO,YES) [NO]:
|  
|       Unit to change:
|  
|  When you have finished changing a unit, you may enter another unit  to
|  CHANGE.   If you wish to be prompted for another startup option, press
|  RETURN.
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.2  DEFINing Structures and System Lists
|  
|  This section describes the DEFINE startup option.   In  the  following
|  examples, the DEFINE startup option is selected first, followed by the
|  item to define.  The text that you type is underlined.
|  
|  To DEFINE the Active Swapping List (E,U):
|  
|  The Active Swapping List is the list of units that the system will use
|  to  store  data  that  is  swapped  to  disk.  The units in the Active
|  Swapping List should have swapping space allocated on them.  Make this
|  allocation  with  the  DEFINE STRUCTure startup option.  To change the
|  amount of swapping space allocated to the units in  the  list,  select
|  the  CHANGE UNIT startup option.  For the most efficient swapping, the
|  units  should  be  listed  in  the  order  of   fastest   to   slowest
|  accessibility.
|  
|  The swapping list is divided into  classes,  where  Class  0  is  used
|  first,  then Class 1.  All swapping units should be placed in Class 0,
|  except units that have slow I/O.  Be sure to include  all  or  several
|  controllers in the swap list.  Use the DEFINE STRUCTure startup option
|  to assign a unit to a swapping class.  To change the swapping class of


                                    A-14
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  a unit, use the CHANGE UNIT startup option.
|  
|  Enter the names of the units in the Active Swapping  List.   Enter  an
|  extra RETURN when the list is complete.
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE ASL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of units to appear in the active swapping list, one
|       per line.  Terminate list with a blank line.
|       RXxn<RET>
|       <RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To DEFINE the System Dump List (E,U):
|  
|  Enter the names of the structures in the System Dump List.   Enter  an
|  extra RETURN when the list is complete.
|  
|  The System Dump List is the list of structures where the  system  will
|  attempt  to write the crash file whenever the system is halted.  Space
|  should be allocated on every structure in the System Dump List for the
|  crash  file.   Make  this allocation with the DEFINE STRUCTure startup
|  option.  To change the amount of space allocated for the  crash  file,
|  select the CHANGE STRUCTure startup option.
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE SDL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of structures to appear in the system dump list, one
|       per line.  Terminate list with a blank line.
|       DSKx<RET>
|       <RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To DEFINE the System Search List (E,U):
|  
|  Enter the name of each structure in the SSL, in the order in which the
|  search list should be accessed.  Type an extra RETURN when the list is
|  complete.
|  
|  The System Search List is a list of file  structures,  listed  in  the
|  order  that  they will be searched whenever the ersatz device SYS:  is
|  specified or implied.  The system CUSPs must be accessible through the
|  System Search List.
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE SSL<RET>
|  
|       Enter names of structures to appear in the system search list,
|       one per line.  Terminate list with a blank line.
|       DSKP<RET>
|       <RET>


                                    A-15
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       Startup option:
|  
|  To DEFINE a structure (E,U):
|  
|  Enter the name of a structure to define and press RETURN.  Then, enter
|  the logical names of units within that structure.
|  
|       Startup option:DEFINE STRUCT<RET>
|  
|       In  the  following  dialogue,  all  numbers  are  decimal  unless
|       otherwise  indicated.  Values within square brackets are defaults
|       which will be substituted if RETURN is pressed.
|  
|       Any question preceeded with an asterisk indicates  changing  that
|       parameter will require the structure to be refreshed.
|  
|  
|                                 *** Note ***
|       HOME blocks will be initialized immediately after  all  units  in
|       the structure have been entered.
|       Structure to define:DSKx<RET>
|       Disk drive for logical unit 0:RXxn<RET>
|       Disk drive for logical unit 1:<RET>
|  
|  ONCE checks the BAT  blocks  for  each  unit.   BAT  blocks  point  to
|  hardware  errors  on the disk pack.  Two BAT blocks are written on the
|  pack when it is formatted, and the system updates them when  it  finds
|  blocks  on  the  disk that cannot be read from or written to.  The BAT
|  blocks are  first  checked  for  consistency  errors.   They  must  be
|  formatted   properly,   so   that   the  system  can  read  them.   If
|  inconsistencies are found in both blocks on the  unit,  they  will  be
|  reported.   If  the first BAT block is all right, the second BAT block
|  is not checked, because the second can be updated with a copy  of  the
|  first.
|  
|  You have the option of listing the bad regions pointed to by  the  BAT
|  blocks.   This information would be useful if only the first BAT block
|  had a consistency error.  If both BAT blocks  are  inconsistent,  then
|  this  information would be useless.  Therefore, if the first BAT block
|  is inconsistent, but the second is consistent, and if the list of  bad
|  regions  on  the  disk is lengthy, you should consider having the disk
|  reformatted.
|  
|       Do you want to see the bad regions (NO,YES) [NO]:
|  
|  ONCE initializes the HOME blocks.  Each disk pack  contains  two  HOME
|  blocks that contain pertinent information about the disk unit, such as
|  the file structure it is in, swapping space that has been allocated on
|  the unit, and the other unit-specific information that ONCE allows you
|  to change.
|  
|       [HOME blocks initialized on RXxn]


                                    A-16
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  If you ask to see the bad regions, the bad regions will be  listed  by
|  unit according to the format shown below:
|  
|       % Unit RXxn bad blocks:
|         First  block  No.   CPU    Cont   Unit  Error
|         ------------  ---  -----   ----   ----  -----
|  
|  
|  You have the option of initializing the  BAT  blocks.   Initialization
|  rewrites the BAT blocks completely.  All previous data about errors on
|  the disk will be deleted and the BAT blocks will be filled in  by  the
|  system  as  it attempts to read/write the disk.  The BAT blocks should
|  only  be  initialized   if   both   have   been   reported   to   have
|  inconsistencies,  or  if a disk channel has been erroneously reporting
|  hard errors on the disk.
|  
|  When the BAT blocks are rewritten, the old BAT blocks  will  be  lost,
|  and  the  information  about  bad  areas  on  the disk will have to be
|  rewritten into the new BAT blocks.
|  
|       Initialize BAT blocks (NO,YES) [NO]:
|  
|  If you answer YES, you will be  informed  that  the  action  has  been
|  completed:
|  
|       [BAT blocks initialized on RXxn]
|  
|  Enter a value to specify the cluster size for the structure, or accept
|  the default value by pressing RETURN.
|  
|  The cluster size  is  critical  to  efficient  use  of  the  disk.   A
|  one-block  data  file  requires  3 blocks on disk, including RIB, data
|  block, and spare RIB.  If a cluster size of 10 were assigned, 7 blocks
|  would  be wasted for this one-block file.  The cluster size should not
|  be set to less than 3, but the actual size depends upon  the  type  of
|  applications using the disk.  The monitor requires a retrieval pointer
|  for each cluster in the file it is accessing.  Therefore, the  cluster
|  size  should  not  be  too  small for the size of the average file.  A
|  large file with a small cluster size wastes monitor overhead.
|  
|  The default value listed by ONCE is determined by  the  type  of  disk
|  unit.   The  best  value  depends on the type of application using the
|  disk, but the default is often appropriate.
|  
|       Parameters for structure DSKx
|          *Blocks per cluster (3 - 262143) [10]:
|  
|  Your next entry sets the privacy status of  a  structure.   A  private
|  structure requires that users who wish to access it must use the MOUNT
|  command to access that structure.  A system structure is not  private,
|  and  may  be  accessed  by  any  user  without explicitly mounting the
|  structure for the job.


                                    A-17
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|           Private structure (NO,YES) [NO]:
|  
|  A file structure need not have an owner PPN.  However,  if  the  owner
|  PPN  is set, the user with that PPN has full file access of the entire
|  structure.  Enter a PPN if you want to set or change the owner PPN  of
|  the  structure.   If  you  press  return,  the  default  value will be
|  accepted and the current PPN will be cleared without replacing it.
|  
|  The PPN may be wildcarded.  Note that a PPN of [*,*] allows all  users
|  full access to all files on the structure.
|  
|           Owner PPN [NONE]:
|           Disk-set (1-36,ALL,NONE) [ALL]:
|  
|  If this structure will be included in the System Dump List,  you  must
|  allocate  space  for  the  crash  file.   Enter a value to specify the
|  amount of space to allow on the structure for a crash file.  The crash
|  file,  CRASH.EXE,  is  the  copy  of  memory  that  is written to disk
|  automatically when the system crashes.  This value should be at  least
|  the  size  of  the  maximum amount of memory used by your system.  For
|  RP20 and CI disks, however, this value should be 0.
|  
|          *Number of K for CRASH.EXE (0 - 4096) [4096]:
|  
|  Enter the number of blocks each user is allowed on the  structure  for
|  overdraw  purposes.  The maximum allowable value is a variable that is
|  dependant upon the type of disk unit.
|  
|  When the system attempts to write a file for a user  whose  disk-space
|  quota  on  the  structure is not large enough to accommodate the whole
|  file, a number of blocks over the quota can be allowed:   this  number
|  is  the "overdraw".  When the user reaches the disk quota, the monitor
|  does not allow new files to be created.   It  attempts  to  write  the
|  files that are open at the time quota was exceeded.
|  
|           Blocks allowed for overdraw per user (0 - 307800) [500]:
|  
|  Determine the number of consecutive blocks that the system will  check
|  for when searching for free space on disk to write files.
|  
|  When the system attempts to write to disk,  it  tries  to  allocate  a
|  consecutive  number  of  blocks  that  are  free.   You are allowed to
|  specify this number.  If the consecutive blocks are found, the file is
|  written  and  the SAT block pointers are changed to reflect the change
|  in free space.  If the system cannot  find  a  consecutive  number  of
|  blocks  of  the  size  specified  here, the file will be stored in the
|  first free space, fragmented if necessary.  Therefore, the  value  you
|  give  can  affect  the  efficiency of file storage on the disk.  It is
|  recommended that you use a multiple of the cluster size.  A number too
|  small  can result in fragmented disk files and excessive time spent in
|  accessing files.



                                    A-18
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|           Consecutive blocks tried for on output 90 - 262143) [30]:
|  
|  Enter the number of bits per cluster count, or press RETURN to  accept
|  the default.
|  
|          *Bits per cluster count (0 - 18) [12]:
|  
|  The system search list is a list of file structures, in the order that
|  they will be searched whenever the ersatz device SYS:  is specified or
|  implied.  The system CUSPs  must  be  accessible  through  the  system
|  search  list.   Enter YES if you want this structure to be included in
|  the SSL.
|  
|           Make this the only structure in the SSL (NO,YES) [YES]:
|  
|  The system dump list is the list of structures where the  system  will
|  attempt  to write the crash file whenever the system is halted.  Space
|  should be allocated on every structure in the system dump list for the
|  crash file.  Allocation for the crash file was made above.
|  
|           Make this the only structure in the SDL (NO,YES) [YES]:
|  
|  Specify a unit identification.  This  identification  resides  in  the
|  HOME  blocks  on  the disk unit, for unique identification of the disk
|  pack.  Therefore, it  should  be  a  unique  number  that  will  never
|  conflict  with  another code.  Every pack should have a unit-id of six
|  alphanumeric characters that may be a portion  of  the  pack's  serial
|  number.
|  
|       Parameters for unit RXxn
|           Unit ID [XXXXn]:
|  
|  Specify the number  of  SAT  blocks  on  the  unit.   The  default  is
|  calculated according to the type of disk unit.  As a general rule, you
|  should select the minimum number of  SAT  blocks,  to  reduce  monitor
|  overhead.
|  
|          *SAT blocks per unit (8 - 81) [8]:
|  
|  Enter the number of SAT blocks to be stored in memory  for  the  unit.
|  While  the  unit  is mounted, the SAT blocks on the unit are stored in
|  memory for fast access by the system.  All of the SAT blocks should be
|  stored in memory.
|  
|           SAT blocks in core (1 - 8) [8]:
|  
|  Specify the amount of swapping space allowed on the unit.   The  total
|  allocated on all units should be at least 2 times memory size.
|  
|  If enough space is not allowed, swapping  space  may  run  out  during
|  timesharing.   The only way to expand the swapping space is to refresh
|  the disk, which destroys all user files.  If the unit is or will be in


                                    A-19
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  the  system's  Active  Swapping List, you must allocate some space for
|  swapping on the unit.
|  
|          *K for swapping (0 - 4807) [4807]:
|  
|  ONCE calculates the address of  the  first  logical  block  where  the
|  system  will  attempt  to write swapped data.  This address appears as
|  the default value.  The default is usually  appropriate,  because  the
|  swapping  space  is  put  in  the  middle of the disk, to minimize the
|  average seek time when accessing the swapping space.  However, you may
|  change this value.
|  
|          *First logical block for swapping (33090 - 269332) [134672]:
|  
|  The swapping list is divided into  classes,  where  Class  0  is  used
|  first, then Class 1.
|  
|           Swapping class (0 - 1) [0]:
|  
|  The active swapping list is the list of units that the system will use
|  to  store  data  that is swapped to disk.  If you wish to include this
|  unit in the active swapping list, enter YES below:
|  
|           Make this the only unit in the ASL (NO,YES) [YES]:
|  
|  If you have changed any  parameters  marked  with  an  asterisk,  ONCE
|  reminds you that the structure must be refreshed:
|  
|       % Structure DSKx must be refreshed before it can be used.
|  
|       Structure to define:
|  
|  When you have finished defining a structure,  you  may  enter  another
|  structure  to  DEFINE.  If you wish to be prompted for another startup
|  option, press RETURN.
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.3  DESTROYing All Structures
|  
|  This section  describes  the  DESTROY  startup  option.   The  DESTROY
|  startup  option  is  used  to initialize the disk system using default
|  parameters.  This option is available only in executive mode.
|  
|  The DESTROY option is very  powerful.   When  the  DESTROY  option  is
|  selected, the disks are refreshed, deleting all files on the disk, and
|  the HOME and SAT blocks  are  initialized,  deleting  all  information
|  about  the disk's place in system lists and file structures.  For this
|  reason, the ONCE program ensures that you want to select  the  DESTROY
|  option  by  printing  a  warning  message before accepting the DESTROY
|  startup option.   This  warning  is  intended  to  prevent  accidental
|  destruction of disk data.


                                    A-20
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  The DESTROY option sets the disk parameters to defaults  predetermined
|  by  the  monitor.  Those defaults are based on the types of disk units
|  reported by the disk controllers, and values  of  the  parameters  are
|  calculated  by  ONCE.  The DESTROY startup option routine is discussed
|  in Chapter 4.
|  
|  The parameters set by ONCE and the values  defaulted  by  the  DESTROY
|  option  are  listed  in Table A-1, below.  The unit types in Table A-1
|  are designated by controller names that are described in Table A-2.
|  
|  Table A-1 shows the types of disk controllers that are  recognized  by
|  ONCE  and the order in which they are characterized.  The construction
|  of file structures and system lists is dependent upon the type of disk
|  controllers  at  each installation.  For example, if the controller in
|  the first column does not  exist,  ONCE  configures  starting  at  the
|  second column, and so forth.
|  
|  
|  Table A-1:  Disk Parameters Defaulted By DESTROY Option
|  
|  
|                            STRUCTURE PARAMETERS
|  
|  
|    Parameter Type              Default Parameter Values
|  
|    Unit type            |  FH  | FS   | RP   | DP   | RN   | RA
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    Max. no.             |      |      |      |      |      |
|    of units             |  0   | 32   | 16   | 32   | 16   | 8
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    Starting             |      |      |      |      |      |
|    structure            |      |      |      |      |      |
|    name                 | ---- | DSKA | DSKB | DSKE | DSKF | DSKI
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    No. of structures    |      |      |      |      |      |
|    to build             | 0    | 1    | 3    | 1    | 3    | 3
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    No. of               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    consecutive          |      |      |      |      |      |
|    blocks               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    tried for            |      |      |      |      |      |
|    on output            | 10   | 10   | 30   | 30   | 30   | 30
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    No. of               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    blocks               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    guaranteed           |      |      |      |      |      |
|    to each              |      |      |      |      |      |
|    user                 | 0    | 0    | 0    | 0    | 0    | 0
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    No. of               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    blocks               |      |      |      |      |      |


                                    A-21
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|    allowed for          |      |      |      |      |      |
|    over-draw            |      |      |      |      |      |
|    for each             |      |      |      |      |      |
|    user                 | 200  | 100  | 500  | 500  | 500  | 500
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    Private              |      |      |      |      |      |
|    structure?           | NO   | NO   | NO   | NO   | NO   | NO
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    #K for               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    CRASH.EXE            | 0    | 0    | -1   | -1   | 0    | 0
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    No. of               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    blocks per           |      |      |      |      |      |
|    cluster              | 1    | 1    | 10   | 5    | 50   | 10
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    No. of               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    bits per             |      |      |      |      |      |
|    cluster              |      |      |      |      |      |
|    count                | 12   | 12   | 12   | 12   | 12   | 12
|  
|  
|                              UNIT PARAMETERS
|  
|    Unit type            |  FH  | FS   | RP   | DP   | RN   | RA
|    ---------------------------------------------------------------
|    #K for               |      |      |      |      |      |
|    swapping             | 0    | 200  | 1000 | 0    | 0    | 0
                  
|    Unit-id              Defaults to ONCnnn, where nnn is random
|  
|  
|  
|  Table A-2:  Device Channels and Controllers
|  
|  
|    Channels      Controller      Kont-name  Unit Types
|  
|    RH20 --> DX20  | RP20 (master) | RNx      | RP20 (slaves)
|                   |---------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|                   | TM02          | MTX      | TU45, TU70, 
|                   |               |          | TU71, TU72, TU77
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|    RH10, RH20     | Massbus       | FSx      | RS04
|                   |               |-----------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|                   |               | RPx      | RP04, RP05
|                   |               |          | RP06, RP07
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|    RH11 (KS only) | Massbus       | RPx      | RM03, RP06


                                    A-22
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|                   |---------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|                   | TM0n          | MTx      | TU45, TU78
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|    DF10, DF10C    | RP10          | DPx      | RP02, RP03
|                   |---------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|                   | RC10          | FHx      | drums
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|    DX10           | TX01          | MTx      | TU70, TU71, TU72
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|    RH20           | TM0n          | MTXn     | TU45, TU77
|                   |---------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|                   | TM78          | MTx      | TU78
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|                   |               |          |
|    RH20 --> CI20  | HSC50         | RAX      | RA60, RA80, RA81
|    -------------------------------------------------------------
|  
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.4  DISSOLving a Single Structure
|  
|  This section describes the  DISSOLVE  startup  option.   The  DISSOLVE
|  option is available in executive and user modes.
|  
|  In the following example, the  DISSOLVE  startup  option  is  selected
|  first,  followed by the structure to dissolve.  The text that you type
|  is underlined.
|  
|  A file structure is dissolved by deleting all reference to  that  file
|  structure on the unit.  The units in that structure will not be listed
|  as part of any file structure until you define  a  file  structure  as
|  containing those units.
|  
|       Startup option:DISSOLVE<RET>
|       Structure to dissolve:DSKx<RET>
|       All data will be destroyed.  Are you sure (NO,YES) [NO]:YES<RET>
|       Structure to dissolve:
|  
|  Enter another structure to dissolve or press RETURN to select  another
|  startup option.







                                    A-23
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  A.3.5  EXITing to Monitor Level
|  
|  This section illustrates the EXIT startup option.  EXIT returns you to
|  monitor level.
|  
|  You may EXIT only when running ONCE in user mode.
|  
|       Startup option:EXIT<RET>
|       .
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.6  GO Option
|  
|  This  section  describes  the  GO  startup  option.   This  option  is
|  available only in executive mode.
|  
|       Startup option:GO<RET>
|  
|  The GO option allows you to start up the monitor without changing  any
|  disk parameters.  INITIA is allowed to run, but offline disk units are
|  not checked for or reported.  Because the  GO  startup  option  starts
|  INITIA, one of the following files must exist:
|  
|       SYS:TTY.INI to set up terminal line characteristics.
|  
|       SYS:OPR.ATO to be read by OPSER automatically.
|  
|  INITIA first attempts to read TTY.INI.  If the file does not exist  in
|  SYS,  it  runs OPSER, which attempts to read OPR.ATO.  If OPR.ATO does
|  not exist, OPSER prints an error message.  You  can  exit  from  OPSER
|  typing CTRL/C and continue.
|  
|  If TTY.INI exists, then INITIA follows the  instructions  in  TTY.INI.
|  The  following  example  assumes that TTY.INI exists, and contains the
|  line:
|  
|       CTY       GALOPR
|  
|  INITIA reads the line, and starts OPR on the CTY, where  the  commands
|  are   entered.   INITIA  reads  SYS:SYSJOB.INI,  starting  the  system
|  programs, and then waits for input.  Type the  EXIT  command  to  exit
|  from OPR:
|  
|       MONITOR  FEB-16-88
|       Why reload:OTHER ;TEST<RET>
|       Date: FEB-20-88<RET>
|       Time: 11:35<RET>
|  
|       Startup option: GO<RET>
|  
|       MONITOR  11:35:32  CTY  system 1026


                                    A-24
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|       Connected to Node CENTR(0) Line # 45
|       .LOGIN 1,2
|       .R OPR
|       OPR>EXIT<RET>
|  
|       .
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.7  NOINITIA Option
|  
|  This section describes the NOINITIA startup option.   This  option  is
|  available only in executive mode.
|  
|  You can start up the monitor without running INITIA to initialize  the
|  terminal  lines  by  using  the  NOINITIA option.  Note that this also
|  prevents INITIA  from  reading  the  SYSJOB.INI  file  as  well.   The
|  SYSJOB.INI file is described in Chapter 10.
|  
|  The NOINITIA startup option is identical to the GO option, except that
|  it prevents the INITIA program from running.  Therefore, it is a quick
|  way to  start  the  monitor  without  changing  any  disk  parameters.
|  However,  the  NOINITIA option should not be used to start timesharing
|  because INITIA is required to initialize terminal lines.   INITIA  can
|  be  run  later from the CTY using the INITIA SYS monitor command.  See
|  Chapter 10 for more information about INITIA.
|  
|       TOPS-10 7.04 system FEB-16-88
|       Why reload:OTHER;TEST<RET>
|       Date:FEB-16-88<RET>
|       Time:11:44<RET>
|  
|       Startup option: NOINITIA<RET>
|  
|  After entering NOINITIA and pressing RETURN, ONCE checks  for  offline
|  disk  units  and  lists  them.  However, you are not allowed to change
|  them.
|  
|       %UNIT-NAME is offline
|  
|       TOPS-10 7.04 system FEB-16-88
|  
|       .
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.8  REFRESHing Selected Structures
|  
|  This section describes the REFRESH startup option.  In  the  following
|  example, the REFRESH startup option is selected first, followed by the
|  structure to refresh.  The text that you type is underlined.



                                    A-25
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  Structures may be refreshed in executive and user modes.
|  
|                                 WARNING
|  
|          When you refresh a file structure you destroy all data
|          on  the  structure.   Therefore, ONCE attempts to make
|          absolutely certain that  you  intend  to  refresh  the
|          structure before doing so.
|  
|  The  REFRESH  option  forces  a  refresh   procedure   to   initialize
|  characteristics  that require refreshing.  When you select the REFRESH
|  startup option, the HOME blocks of all units are checked to  determine
|  which  file  structures  need to be refreshed.  Then, you are asked to
|  enter the name of a file structure to be refreshed.  After refreshing,
|  you  will  again  be  asked  for  the  name  of a file structure to be
|  refreshed.  If you press RETURN without providing the name of  a  file
|  structure, you will be prompted to enter another startup option.
|  
|       Startup option:REFRESH<RET>
|       Structure to refresh:DSKx<RET>
|       Structure does not need refreshing.
|       Are you sure (NO,YES) [NO]:NO<RET>
|       Structure to refresh:<RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  Enter another structure to refresh or press RETURN.
|  
|  
|  
|  A.3.9  SHOWing System Parameters
|  
|  This section describes the SHOW  startup  option.   In  the  following
|  examples,  the  SHOW startup option is selected first, followed by the
|  item to show.  The text that you type is underlined.
|  
|  To SHOW the Active Swapping List (E,U):
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW ASL<RET>
|  
|       Swapping units:
|               Unit    UnitID  Class   Space (K)
|               ----    ------  -----   ---------
|               RPA0    DSKD0     0          4807
|               RPA6    KLAD0     0          4807
|               RPB4    DSKP0     0         20000
|                    (Memory size = 2048K)
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  The Active Swapping List is the list of units that the system will use
|  to  store  data that is swapped to disk.  The swapping list is divided


                                    A-26
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  into classes, where Class 0 is used first, then Class 1, Class 2,  and
|  so on.
|  
|  To SHOW the date (E):
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW DATE<RET>
|       Thursday 4-Feb-88 :27:58
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To SHOW networks (E,U):
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW NETWOR<RET>
|  
|       Networks:
|               System-wide node name:  DEC10
|               ANF-10 node DEC10(10)
|               DECnet node DEC10(7.169)
|               LAT service:  DEC10
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To SHOW the System Dump List (E,U):
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW SDL<RET>
|       System dump list:  DSKD, DSKP
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To SHOW the System Search List (E,U):
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW SSL<RET>
|  
|       System search list:
|               Structure       Position
|               ---------       --------
|                 DSKD              0
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To SHOW disk sets (E,U):
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW SETS<RET>
|       Disk sets:  2, 6, 11, 26
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To SHOW a structure (E,U):
|  
|  Enter a  structure  to  SHOW.   If  you  enter  ALL,  ONCE  lists  the
|  parameters  for  all  the  structures  that are online and repeats the
|  question so that you can SHOW parameters for another structure.   When


                                    A-27
                            ONCE STARTUP OPTIONS


|  you  enter  a  structure  to  show,  you  are  provided with a list of
|  parameters for that structure or  structures.   This  listing  can  be
|  useful  if  you wish to change the parameters of a file structure.  If
|  you do not wish to SHOW a structure, press  RETURN  and  you  will  be
|  prompted for another startup option.
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW STRUCT<RET>
|       Structure:DSKD<RET>
|  
|       Parameters for structure DSKD
|          *Blocks per cluster:  10
|           Private structure:  NO
|           Owner PPN:  [10,56]
|           Disk-set:  ALL
|          *Number of K for CRASH.EXE:  4096
|           Blocks allowed for overdraw per user:  500
|           Consecutive blocks tried for on output:  0
|          *Bits per cluster count:  15
|           Position in the SSL:  0
|           Unit in the SDL:  YES
|       Structure:<RET>
|  
|       Startup option:
|  
|  To SHOW a unit (E,U):
|  
|  Enter a unit to SHOW.  When you enter a unit to show, you are provided
|  with  a  list  of  the  parameters of any disk unit or all disk units.
|  This listing is useful when changing the parameters of  a  disk  unit.
|  If  you  type ALL, parameters of all of the disk units will be listed.
|  If you specify a unit, ONCE lists the unit parameters and then repeats
|  the question so you can SHOW another unit.  If you do not wish to SHOW
|  a unit, press RETURN and you will  be  prompted  for  another  startup
|  option.
|  
|       Startup option:SHOW UNIT<RET>
|       Unit:  RPA0<RET>
|  
|       Parameters for unit RPA0
|           Unit ID:  DSKD0
|          *K for swapping:  4807
|          *First logical block for swapping:  134672
|           Swapping class:  0
|          *SAT blocks for unit:  8
|          *SAT blocks in core:  8
|           Unit in the ASL:  YES
|       Unit:<RET>
|  
|       Startup option:





                                    A-28











                                 APPENDIX B

                           MODIFYING THE MONITOR



   B.1  REBUILDING THE MONITOR LIBRARY FILE

   The monitor library file, TOPS10.REL is distributed with  the  TOPS-10
   monitor  in  a  standard  form.   It is linked with the monitor common
   modules (COMMON, COMDEV, and COMMOD), as explained in Section  9.3  of
   this  manual.   For  new  installations, the procedure in Chapter 9 is
   sufficient for building the monitor.

   The monitor library file contains assembled code for all  the  bundled
   monitor  modules.   If  an  installation has made modifications to the
   monitor, or if you changed any settings of feature test options in the
   FGEN portion of MONGEN, you must reassemble the monitor library file.

                                    NOTE

           The symbol values and configuration  options  possible
           with  this  procedure  are  so  numerous  that  it  is
           impossible to predict results  in  every  combination.
           Therefore,  you  should  be  aware  that the resulting
           operating system  may  not  be  supported  by  Digital
           Equipment Corporation.

   Several modules must appear in a specific order.  They are:
|  
|       F.MAC
|       S.MAC
|       NETPRM.MAC
|       DTEPRM.MAC
|       SYSCNF.MAC+COMMON.MAC
|       SYSCNF.MAC+COMDEV.MAC
|       SYSCNF.MAC+COMMOD.MAC
|       EJBDAT.REL
|       FILFND.MAC
|       FILIO.MAC
|       FILUUO.MAC
|       RHXKON.MAC
|       RPXKON.MAC


                                    B-1
   These files must precede all other modules, and must be listed in this
   order.   The following files must be placed, in this order, at the end
   of the list:
|  
|       PATCH.MAC
|       EDDT.REL
|       USRONC.MAC
|  
   For more information about building the monitor library file, read the
   batch control file COMPIL.CTL.



   B.2  CHANGING COMMON SYMBOLS

   The COMMON, COMDEV, and COMMOD modules contain  symbols  that  may  be
   redefined  with  MONGEN.   This  section  lists  those  symbols.  When
   entering the symbols to MONGEN, type them in the form:

        symbol,value

   The symbols and their default values are listed here as they might  be
   typed in the MONGEN dialog.

|  The following symbols may be changed in Questions 109 through  111  of
|  the  SYSGEN  portion  of  MONGEN.   Decimal  values  are  changed with
|  Question 109, Octal values are changed with Question 110,  and  SIXBIT
|  values are changed with Question 111.
|  
|  
|  
|  B.2.1  Symbols Defined in COMMON
|  
|  The following symbols are defined in COMMON.  The symbols  are  listed
|  in the form symbol,default-value.
|  
|  
|  
|  B.2.1.1  Decimal Symbols,Values -
|  
|  The following symbols are defined with values in decimal radix.  These
|  default  values can be changed with Question 109 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.

        ERPTMX,80           Specifies the length of block for errors.

        EVBN,128            Blocks  available  for  mapping  buffers  and
                            IOWDs.

        HIGHXC,80           Highest extended channel.

        IFC0,5              Swapper fairness count maximum.

        LIM1HS,30           Limit of stopcodes in any 1 hour period.



                                    B-2
        LOGSIZ,34           17K (current size of LOGIN CUSP).

        M.BMAX,13           Maximum  number  of  simultaneous  batch  job
                            streams.

        M.CBAT,10           Number of bad addresses in per CPU bad.

        M.CLSN,16           Number of CPU classes for scheduler.

        M.CMCT,32           Number of calls to CHKTAL routine.

        M.DNSZ,30000        DECnet free core size.

        M.DTLS,90           CPU time limit (seconds) to set.

        M.EBPS,12500000     Default number of EBOX ticks per second.

        M.ENQD,100          Default ENQ quota.

        M.ENQM,500          Maximum number of active queues.

        M.ETSZ,3000         Ethernet free core size.

        M.KNSZ,3000         KLNI free core size.

        M.LASZ,15000        LAT free core size.

        M.LCST,0            Length of the Line Data  Block  reserved  for
                            customer definition.

        M.MBPS,9750000      Default MBOX references per second.

        M.OMSM,60           Number of minutes between calls to BIGBEN.

        M.PCST,0            Length of the Process Data Block reserved for
                            customer definition.

|       M.PFHT              Default  Page  Fault   Handler   timer   trap
|                           interval.

        M.SCSZ,4000         SCA free core size.

        MAXNBP,64           Maximum number of SNOOP UUO breakpoints.

        MEMITL,4            Number of ways memory can be interleaved.

|       MINCOR,Jobn*300     Assume 3 DDBS per job.

        MINMAX,1024*12      Smallest legal CORMAX.

        MLACTS,39           Maximum length of the account string.

        NSPMEM,1000         1000 nano-seconds per memory cycle.

        PAVJSP,20           Predicted average job size.


                                    B-3
        RLDTIM,112          Time to auto-reload.

        SFC0,20             CPU0 scheduler fairness count.

        SFC1,20             CPU1 scheduler fairness count.

        TTDMOS,16           Maximum output string for RSX-20F.

        UFC0,10             UUO fairness counter maximum.

        UFC1,10             UUO fairness counter for slave.



   B.2.1.2  Octal Symbols,Values -

|  The following symbols are defined by values  in  octal  radix.   These
|  default  values can be changed with Question 110 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.

        BPTBIT,0            Initial user "SET DDT BREAKPOINT" setting.

        CTYDCR,0            Delay for RETURN on CTY during ONCE.

        CTYDLF,0            Delay for LINE FEED on CTY during ONCE.

|       DEFBPT,0            Initial CPU  breakpoint  mask  (one  bit  per
|                           CPU).
|  
        DEFDEB,0            Debugging word.

        DTTRY,4             Number of times to retry on DECtape errors.

        INDPPN,0            0  means  project  programmer   numbers   are
                            dependant across projects.  That is, owner of
                            PPN is determined by programmer number only.

        LIM1MS,4            Limit of stopcodes in any 1 minute period.

        LIM8MS,7            Limit of stopcodes in any 8 minute period.

        M.BMIN,0            Minimum number of guaranteed batch jobs.

        M.CLSS,1            Scheduler is class system scheduler.

        M.DCLS,0            Scheduler class for new jobs.

        M.EMRT,0            Default is regular runtime.

        M.ITA,0             Default is to use interval timer.

        M.JMAX,M.JOB-M.BMIN Maximum number  of  simultaneous  interactive
                            jobs.

        M.PIDN,JOBN*2       Size of PIDTAB.


                                    B-4
        M.RCMP,0            Prohibits  execution  of  restricted  command
                            features from remote terminals.

        M.STOF,0            Frequency to call start TTY output  (must  be
                            2^n-1).

        M.WCH,JW.WMT        Watch bits used to set initial.

        M.XFFA,0            Do file access protection checking  on  [1,2]
                            and JACCT.

        SCHEDN,0            Schedule value.

        STDENS,5            Standard density (6250 BPI).

        SYSSEG,-1           Minus one for fast GETSEG from SYS.

        TTXTRA,0            Number of extra TTY DDBs for slave lines.



   B.2.1.3  SIXBIT Symbols,Values -

|  The following symbols are defined by values in  SIXBIT  radix.   These
|  default  values can be changed with Question 111 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.
|  
|       M.CRSH,CRSCPY       Default crash copy program name.
|  
|       M.MAIL,MS           Name of mail program



   B.2.2  Symbols Defined in COMDEV

|  The following symbols are defined in COMDEV.  The symbols  are  listed
|  in the form symbol,default-value.



   B.2.2.1  Decimal Symbols,Values -

   The following symbols are defined with values in decimal radix.  These
   default  values can be changed with Question 109 of the SYSGEN portion
   of MONGEN.

        DSETIM,320          Maximum time to  do  a  data  security  erase
                            (seconds).

        IDLSEC,90           Any terminal idle this number of seconds gets
                            disconnected.

        LPTSIZ,27+2         LPT  buffer  size  in   words   (132   column
                            printer).



                                    B-5
        M.AIDL,n            The number  of  seconds  before  idle  ANF-10
                            lines  are  disconnected, where n defaults to
                            the current value for IDLESEC (see above).

        M.DIDL,n            The number of  seconds  before  idle  dataset
                            lines  are  disconnected, where n defaults to
                            the current value for IDLESEC (see above).

        M.LIDL,n            The number of seconds before idle  LAT  lines
                            are  disconnected,  where  n  defaults to the
                            current value for IDLESEC (see above).

        M.NIDL,n            The number of seconds before  idle  NRT/CTERM
                            lines  are  disconnected, where n defaults to
                            the current value for IDLESEC (see above).
|  
|       MSGMAX,512          Maximum message size in the network.

        MTSIZ,128           Magtape buffer size in words.

        NOISE,12            Noise record length in bytes.
|  
|       NTTPLN,32           Size of a terminal Process Control Block.

        TAPTIM,60           Maximum time to skip 10 records (seconds).

|       TTCHKS,8            Size of words in a TTY chunk, in powers of 2,
|                           with  a minimum of 8.  Increasing the size of
|                           a TTY chunk can increase TTY throughput.
|  
        TTYRMT,1            Remote terminal.  If 1, terminal  is  remote.
                            If 2, terminal is local.



   B.2.2.2  Octal Symbols,Values -

|  The following symbols are defined by values  in  octal  radix.   These
|  default  values can be changed with Question 110 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.

        MAXODR,6            Maximum number of  data  requests  for  input
                            devices.
|  
|       MSGXMX,512          Maximum message size the -10 will transmit.

        MTDAEM,10           Number of times per reel to call  DAEMON  for
                            magtape error reports.

        MTDLTP,LT.BLP       Default label type.

        MTELOG,-1           Zero to log all recovered magtape errors.





                                    B-6
   B.2.3  Symbols Defined in COMMOD

|  The following symbols are defined in COMMOD.  The symbols  are  listed
|  in the form symbol,default-value.



   B.2.3.1  Decimal Symbols,Values -

|  The following symbols are defined with values in decimal radix.  These
|  default  values can be changed with Question 109 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.

        BLKMAX,100000       Maximum number of blocks to transfer (KL10).

        BLKMAX,252          Maximum number of blocks to transfer (KS10).

        CHVIFP,10           Standard   initial   fairness    count    for
                            positioning.

        CHVIFT,10           Standard   initial   fairness    count    for
                            transferring.

        DSKTRY,10           Number of error trys on disk data errors.

        FIL4WD,9            Number of 8 word core  blocks  per  job  (for
                            NMB,PPB,UFB,ACC).

|       M.BNDT,16           Number of seconds before binding CI disks  at
|                           ONCE time.
|  
        MAXUSI,8            Maximum negative  USETI  (maximum  number  of
                            extended RIBs).

        MFDSIZ,30           Number of  blocks  for  initial  MFD  set  by
                            refresher.

        PTRLEN,7            Number  of  in-core  retrieval  pointers  per
                            file.

        RCLTRY,10           Number of times to try 'DSKTRY' data errors.

        SERTRY,3            Number of times to try on search errors.

        SWCLSN,7            Highest class for swapping.

        SWPMAX,8            Maximum number of units for swapping.

        UNVRSF,500          Reciprocal safety factor for each unit.



   B.2.3.2  Octal Symbols,Values -

|  The following symbols are defined by values  in  octal  radix.   These


                                    B-7
|  default  values can be changed with Question 110 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.

        CCWMAX,1            Maximum number of data channel command words.

        LBFSIZ,1000         Default  large-buffer  size  (OP.LBF  on   an
                            OPEN).   Specify  the octal value in words in
                            multiples of 200.

        LIMLVL,5            Maximum  number  of  nested  SFDs  for   this
                            monitor.
|  
|       LNMMXL,144          Maximum length of any logical name specified.
|  
|       LNMMAX,77           Maximum number of logical names.

        M.CBMX,JOBN-1       Default blocks in disk cache.

        M.DFLB,3            Default number of large disk buffers.

        M.DFNB,6            Default number of disk buffers.

        MFDPRV,555000       MFD privileges (all can READ, LOOKUP).

        PRVFIL,057          Standard file privilege.

        PRVSPL,077          Protection for spooled output.

        PRVSYS,155          Protection for most system programs.

        PRVUFD,775          Standard UFD privilege.

        PRYSYS,157          Protection for SYS:*.SYS.

        RIBERN,0            RIB  error  threshold  for  RIB   errors   on
                            structures in system search list.

        SYNRPR,357000       Privileged files in SYS.

        SYRDPR,355000       Non-privileged files in SYS.

        SYSPRV,775000       SYS UFD privileges (project 1 can read/create
                            on SYS).
|  
|  
|  
|  B.2.3.3  SIXBIT Symbols,Values -
|  
|  The following symbols are defined by values in  SIXBIT  radix.   These
|  default  values can be changed with Question 111 of the SYSGEN portion
|  of MONGEN.
|  
|       M.QSTR,             Default structure  for  device  queues.   The
|                           default value for M.QSTR is blank.  The value
|                           is the SIXBIT name of the file structure  for


                                    B-8
|                           queuing  programs set up by ONCE-only code to
|                           be the first stream up.























































                                    B-9











                                 APPENDIX C

                        SETTING SCHEDULER PARAMETERS



   The SCDSET  program  enables  a  privileged  user  to  accomplish  the
   functions  of the SCHED.  monitor call, and to manipulate a SCDMAP.SYS
   file.  For example, you can use SCDSET to do the following:

         o  Set system usage quotas

         o  Adjust scheduler parameters

         o  Create and modify a SCDMAP.SYS file

         o  Move a SCDMAP.SYS file into the SYS area

         o  Update the class of all logged-in jobs automatically



   C.1  REQUIRED PRIVILEGES

   The privileges required to use SCDSET depend on the functions you want
   to  accomplish.   The following list describes the privileges required
   for different functions.

         o  To manipulate a SCDMAP.SYS file, you need only  to  have  the
            privileges necessary to move the file into the SYS area.

         o  To set system usage quotas, and adjust scheduler  parameters,
            you  must  be  logged in as [1,2], or the SCDSET program must
            have JACCT privileges.

         o  To use the READ/SET functions,  you  must  be  logged  in  as
            [1,2].



   C.2  CAUTIONS

   If you misunderstand how the scheduler works, or make typing  mistakes


                                    C-1
   while  using  SCDSET, you may unintentionally halt all work being done
   on the system.   Therefore,  practice  working  with  SCDSET  and  the
   scheduler  during  non-production  timesharing  until you are familiar
   with both of them.

   To prevent system quotas and sytem load from affecting your work,  run
   SCDSET in a High Priority Queue (HPQ) except when you create or modify
   a SCDMAP.SYS file.  If you use an HPQ when  you  create  or  modify  a
   SCDMAP.SYS file, you adversely affect system performance.



   C.3  SCDSET COMMANDS

   This  section  describes  the  top-level  SCDSET  commands.   It  also
   describes  EDIT  subcommands,  and the parameters you can read and set
   with the READ/SET commands.



   C.3.1  EDIT

   Calls the MAKMAP routine.  The MAKMAP routine enables you to create or
   modify a SCDMAP.SYS file.  EDIT uses the following subcommands:

   SUBCOMMAND     FUNCTION

   COPY/SET       Copies a file from a area or device to the SYS area.

   EXIT           Returns to top-level.

   HELP           Displays EDIT help text.

   ONE CLASS      Changes one scheduler type to a scheduler class in  the
                  SCDMAP.SYS file.

   RANGE          Changes a range of scheduler types to scheduler classes
                  in the SCDMAP.SYS file.

   READ           Reads in a SCDMAP.SYS file for modification.

   TYPE           Displays a specified range of scheduler types.

   WRITE          Writes a SCDMAP.SYS file to a device or area.



   C.3.2  EXIT

   Returns your job to monitor level.







                                    C-2
   C.3.3  HELP

   Displays help text.



   C.3.4  READ/SET

   Execute functions of the SCHED.  monitor call.  You can  read  or  set
   the following parameters:

   PARAMETER      MEANING

   AVG SWAP TIME
                  The estimated average swap time for a  typical  job  on
                  the  system.   The  AVG  SWAP TIME controls the rate at
                  which the swapper changes from one class  to  the  next
                  when it chooses jobs to swap in.

   BB CLASS
                  The class to run as background batch.  Background batch
                  class  jobs  run whenever the system is otherwise idle.
                  PARAMETER MEANING

   BB SWAP TIME
                  The estimated time required to swap a background  batch
                  job.   The  scheduler  uses  the BB SWAP TIME to decide
                  when the system should permit a background batch job to
                  be swapped in.

   CORE SCHEDULING INTERVAL

                  The rate at  which  the  system  stops  accounting  for
                  in-core  protect  time  and stops using in-core protect
                  time to requeue jobs.  The CORE SCHEDULING INTERVAL  is
                  important for systems with a large amount of memory, or
                  very few users.

   CPU SCAN ORDER
                  The scan table used by a CPU or CPUs.

   DEFAULT CLASS
                  The class new jobs assume when they first log in.   The
                  DEFAULT  CLASS  applies  to a new job until LOGIN reads
                  the job's class from SCDMAP.SYS and changes  the  class
                  appropriately.

   FREE CORE GOALS/LIMITS
                  The percentage of free and potentially free memory that
                  must  be  available to the swapper.  If this percentage
                  is not available, the swapper swaps out  jobs  in  long
                  term wait.

   HIGH SEGMENT RETENTION TIME
                  The dormant high segment retention time is high segment


                                    C-3
                  in-core  protect  time.   It prevents the deletion from
                  memory of high segments which have become dormant until
                  a specified time has elapsed.

   IN-CORE FAIRNESS FACTOR
                  The factor that controls the rate at which out of  core
                  jobs and in-core jobs are scheduled for swapping.

   JOB CLASS
                  The scheduler class of all logged in jobs.

   MS INTERVAL
                  The Micro Scheduling interval  (in  jiffies).   The  MS
                  interval  specifies  how  often the scheduler selects a
                  class to be scheduled.

   PRIMARY PERCENTAGES
                  The system  usage  percentages  for  a  particular  job
                  class.   The  sum  of  all  primary  percentages may be
                  fixed.  In this case, the sheduler only chooses  a  job
                  to  run  when its class has the highest priority.  When
                  the sum is fixed,  a  class  cannot  exceed  its  class
                  quota.   If  the  only runnable jobs are in this class,
                  the scheduler runs the null job.

   PROT
                  A constant used to calculate  the  minimum  core  usage
                  quota.   The measurement is in microseconds.  PARAMETER
                  MEANING

   PROT1
                  The in-core timeslice used after a job has expired  its
                  initial  in-core protect time.  PROT1 controls the rate
                  at which  I/O  bound  jobs  circulate  around  the  run
                  queues.

   PROTM
                  The maximum in-core protect time assigned to a job.  It
                  specifies an upper limit for very large jobs.

   PROTOT
                  A constant used to calculate  the  minimum  core  usage
                  quota.  The measurement is in microseconds.

   RESPONSE FAIRNESS
                  The rate at which the scheduler chooses  jobs  to  run.
                  The  rate depends on the order of the jobs in the "just
                  swapped in list", and the allocations specified by  the
                  job classes.

   RUNTIME BY CLASS
                  The amount of runtime each class  has  used  since  the
                  last   time  that  a  class  quota  was  changed.   The
                  measurement  is  in  jiffies.   This   parameter   also
                  displays the percentage of runtime each class has used.


                                    C-4
   SCHEDULER FAIRNESS
                  The rate at which PQ2 jobs are scheduled ahead  of  PQ1
                  jobs.   SCHEDULER FAIRNESS allows compute bound jobs to
                  run even when there are many interactive jobs running.

   SECONDARY ALLOCATION
                  The maximum amount that a class  will  be  given  after
                  using up the primary percentage.

   SWAPPER FAIRNESS
                  The rate at which PQ2 jobs are swapped in ahead of  PQ1
                  jobs.

   TIME BASE
                  The base run quanta (in milliseconds)  for  either  run
                  queue.  Note that internally, the scheduler stores this
                  value in local  jiffies.   Therefore,  it  may  not  be
                  possible   to   adjust   the   time   slice  by  a  few
                  milliseconds.

   TIME MAXIMUM
                  The maximum quantum runtime that a job uses.

   TIME MULTIPLIER
                  The parameter that asssigns a  larger  quantum  runtime
                  for  large  jobs.  The quantum runtime is the result of
                  the following:

                  (TIME BASE)+(TIME MULTIPLIER)*(job size)

                  The scheduler compares the quantum  runtime  to  a  run
                  quantum  maximum,  and  assigns  the smaller of the two
                  values to large jobs.



   C.3.5  UPDATE JOBS

   The UPDATE JOBS command updates all the job parameters  defined  above
   for  logged  in  jobs,  and  writes the changes to files if requested.
   UPDATE JOBS accomplishes this through the FIXJOB routine,  which  does
   the following:

         o  Asks if you want to move a new SCDMAP.SYS  file  to  the  SYS
            area.   If  you answer yes, you move the SCDMAP.SYS file.  If
            you answer NO, FIXJOB calls the MOVMAP routine  to  move  the
            SCDMAP.SYS file.

         o  Gets each logged in job's PPN.

         o  Determines whether to use the batch half or timesharing  half
            of the SCDMAP.SYS file currently on SYS.

         o  Looks in ACTDAE.SYS for the user's scheduler type.



                                    C-5
         o  Executes the SCHED.  monitor call to  put  that  job  in  the
            correct scheduler class.

         o  Prints an error message for each logged in job  it  does  not
            find  in  ACTDAE.SYS,  or  for which the SCHED.  monitor call
            failed.

   The FIXJOB routine does not execute the SCHED.  monitor call for [2,5]
   jobs, or for its own job.



   C.4  THE SCDMAP.SYS FILE

   You must have the SCDMAP.SYS file on  SYS.   The  file  contains  1024
   (decimal) nine bit entries (256 decimal words).  The first 512 entries
   constitute the map for  timesharing  users,  the  second  512  entries
   constitute  the  map  for  batch  users.  Each entry contains a number
   between  zero  and  thirty-one  inclusive  (0-31)  that  specifies   a
   scheduler class.  Each of the 512 scheduler types for both timesharing
   and batch  has  an  entry.   Thus,  at  login  time,  LOGIN  looks  in
   ACTDAE.SYS  for  the PPN's scheduler type and then looks in SCDMAP.SYS
   for the current scheduler class for that scheduler type and  job  type
   (timeshare  or  batch).   If  you do not want to differentiate between
   timeshare and batch, the second half of the map should be identical to
   the first half.

   The format of the SCDMAP.SYS file is as follows:

   Table C-1:  SCDMAP.SYS Format

                             BITS

                 0-8     9-17    18-26    27-35

     Word 0      n0      n1      n2       n3

     Word 1      n4      n5      n6       n7

     Word 2      n8      n9      n10      n11




     Word 127    n508    n509    n510     n511    

     Word 128    m0      m1      m2       m3      

     Word 129    m4      m5      m6       m7      

     Word 130    m8      m9      m10      m11     






                                    C-6
     Word 255    m508    m509    m510     m511    


     nXXX is the location of the Scheduler Class for timesharing  users
     of  Scheduler  Type XXX (as stored in ACTDAE.SYS), and mXXX is the
     location of the Scheduler Class for batch users of Type XXX.



















































                                    C-7











                                 APPENDIX D

                     CREATING BOOTABLE FRONT END MEDIA



|  This appendix documents the procedure for creating bootable front  end
|  media  for  RSX-20F.  These media provide a fallback capability if the
|  front end file system on your system's RP06 disk is damaged or lost.
|  
|  The installation process comprises two parts.  Part 1 of the  process,
|  described  in  Section  D.1,  creates  the  "A"  and  "B"  DECtapes or
|  floppies, and requires  that  your  system  be  standalone.   Part  2,
|  described  in  Section D.2, creates the "C" DECtape or floppy, and can
|  be performed at any time, either before or after part 1 is  performed,
|  without shutting down timesharing on the KL.
|  
|  
|  
|  D.1  BUILDING THE PRIMARY BOOTABLE VOLUMES
|  
|  This procedure assumes:
|  
|        o  that your system has a bootable front end file system mounted
|           on the front end's hard disk drive.
|  
|        o  that the system has been shut down, as this process  must  be
|           done in a standalone environment.
|  
|        o  that you have installed your front end files using the RSXINS
|           procedure described in chapter 8.
|  
|        o  that you have a set of three DECtapes  or  floppies  in  good
|           condition to hold the front end files.
|  
|  
|  The example below illustrates the  procedure  for  both  DECtapes  and
|  floppies.   The  left-hand  column displays the DECtape procedure; the
|  right-hand displays the floppy procedure.
|  
|    1.  Mount the disk pack containing a bootable RSX-20F system in  the
|        front end RP06.



                                    D-1
|    2.  Mount a pair of DECtapes or floppies on drives 0 and  1.   These
|        will become the A and B volumes of the set you are creating.
|  
|    3.  If you are writing DECtapes, ensure that both DECtape drives are
|        write enabled.
|  
|    4.  Set the PDP-11 console switches to 000203.
|  
|    5.  Press the SW/REG and ENABLE switches at the same time.
|  
|    6.  Initialize the media on drive 0:
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR INI<RET>                     PAR>MCR INI<RET>
|        INI>DT0:/INDX=MID<RET>               INI>DX0:<RET>
|  
|  The INI program will now initialize the  volume.   This  process  will
|  take approximately 5 minutes for a DECtape or 30 seconds for a floppy.
|  The INI program will not reprompt when it is complete.
|  
|    7.  Repeat step 6 for drive 1, substituting a 1 for  the  0  in  the
|        command line for INI.
|  
|    8.  Now tell RSX-20F to mount the media:
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR MOU<RET>                     PAR>MCR MOU<RET>
|        MOU>DT0:<RET>                        MOU>DX0:<RET>
|        MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE                MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE
|        MOU>DT1:<RET>                        MOU>DX1:<RET>
|        MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE                MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE
|        MOU><CTRL/Z>                         MOU><CTRL/Z>
|  
|    9.  Create the [5,5] UFD on the volume on  unit  0,  using  the  UFD
|        utility:
|  
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR UFD<RET>                     PAR>MCR UFD<RET>
|        UFD>DT0:[5,5]<RET>                   UFD>DX0:[5,5]<RET>
|  
|  UFD, like INI, does  not  reprompt  when  it  is  finished.   The  UFD
|  creation  process  takes  about  3  minutes  on a DECtape and about 15
|  seconds on a floppy.
|  
|    10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for the volume on drive 1.
|  
|  The remaining commands are common to both DECtape and floppy systems.



                                    D-2
|    11. Invoke the PIP utility to copy the files to both volumes:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR PIP<RET>
|        PIP>@BLDFE1<RET>
|  
|  BLDFE1 is a command file that tells PIP which files to put on each  of
|  the  two  volumes.   It instructs PIP to copy the files to each volume
|  and then to do a directory of the newly-created  files.   The  process
|  will  take  about  40  minutes  for  DECtapes and about 10 minutes for
|  floppies.
|  
|    12. Exit from PIP and boot the unrun image of RSX-20F from the  file
|        RSX20F.SYS.   This  image  will  use the newly created front end
|        volumes as the system device SY:.
|  
|        PIP><CTRL/Z>
|        <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR BOO<RET>
|        BOO>DB0:RSX20F.SYS<RET>
|  
|    13. Wait a few seconds and then type control-backslash.   This  will
|        cause  the  newly-booted  RSX-20F  to  search  for the PARSER on
|        DECtape or floppy 0.
|  
|  Please note that all commands will take somewhat longer to perform, as
|  the files must now be read in from DECtape or floppy.
|  
|        <CTRL/\>
|        INS -- SY MOUNTED, TSK=PARSER
|  
|        PAR -- [PARSER] ESE - EBOX STOPPED - EXAMINE
|        PAR>
|  
|    14. If you are building a  floppy-based  system,  please  skip  this
|        step.   The DECtape version of RSX-20F does not mount DECtape 1,
|        so you must do it manually:
|  
|        PAR>MCR MOU<RET>
|        MOU>DT1:<RET>
|        MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE
|        MOU><CTRL/Z>
|  
|    15. Next, set some PARSER parameters and save the full RSX-20F image
|        to  the front end media.  The last command, which directs SAV to
|        save the system core  image,  will  take  about  10  minutes  to
|        execute.   Once  the save is completed, the newly saved software
|        will be reloaded automatically.
|  
|        <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>SET CONSOLE MAINTENANCE<RET>
|         CONSOLE MODE: MAINTENANCE
|        PAR>SET FAULT-CONTINUATION<RET>
|        PAR>SET DATE<RET>
|        DATE: 16-MAR-88<RET>


                                    D-3
|        TIME: 16:11<RET>
|         CURRENT SYSTEM DATE:
|         WEDNESDAY, 16-MARCH-88 16:11
|         VALIDITY FLAG IS:ON
|        PAR>MCR SAV<RET>
|        SAV>SY0:/WB<RET>
|        [Dn0: dismounted]
|        [Dn1: dismounted]
|  
|  
|        RSX-20F   Vx##-##   16-MAR-88
|  
|        [SY0: redirected to Dx0:]
|        [Dn0: mounted]
|        [Dn1: mounted]
|  
|        PAR -- [PARSER] ESE - EBOX STOPPED - EXAMINE
|        PAR>
|  
|    16. Lower and raise the HALT switch on the PDP-11 console,  set  the
|        PDP-11  console  switches  to  000203,  and press the SW/REG and
|        ENABLE switches at the same time.
|  
|  You may now remove the DECtapes or floppies from the  drives.   Please
|  be  sure to place labels on them identifying the volumes -- the one on
|  drive 0 should be labelled "A"; the one on drive 1, "B".
|  
|  You now have a minimal  bootable  RSX-20F  system  on  the  first  two
|  DECtapes  or  floppies.   If  you wish, you may build the third volume
|  now, or you may reboot the KL system and build the third volume  after
|  timesharing has been restarted.
|  
|  
|  
|  D.2  BUILDING THE THIRD VOLUME
|  
|  To have a complete copy of RSX-20F on console media, you must create a
|  third  volume  of  front  end media.  This volume will hold additional
|  files that will not fit on the first two of the set.
|  
|  The steps involved can be done immediately after Part 1 is  completed,
|  or  they  may  be done later.  It is not necessary to shut down the KL
|  before starting this procedure.
|  
|    1.  Mount the floppy or DECtape that is  to  receive  the  files  on
|        drive 0.
|  
|    2.  Initialize the media on drive 0:
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR INI<RET>                     PAR>MCR INI<RET> 
|        INI>DT0:/INDX=MID<RET>               INI>DX0:<RET>



                                    D-4
|  The INI program will now initialize the  volume.   This  process  will
|  take approximately 5 minutes for a DECtape or 30 seconds for a floppy.
|  The INI program will not reprompt when it is complete.
|  
|    3.  Now tell RSX-20F to mount the device, making  it  available  for
|        use:
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR MOU<RET>                     PAR>MCR MOU<RET>
|        MOU>DT0:<RET>                        MOU>DX0:<RET>
|        MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE                MOU -- MOUNT COMPLETE
|        MOU><CTRL/Z>                         MOU><CTRL/Z>
|  
|    4.  Create the [5,5] UFD on the volume, using the UFD utility:
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR UFD<RET>                     PAR>MCR UFD<RET>
|        UFD>DT0:[5,5]<RET>                   UFD>DX0:[5,5]<RET>
|  
|  UFD, like INI, does  not  reprompt  when  it  is  finished.   The  UFD
|  creation  process  takes  about 2 minutes on a DECtape and about 10-15
|  seconds on a floppy.
|  
|    5.  Now invoke PIP, and tell it to copy the files.  The commands  in
|        this example are common to both DECtape and floppy systems.
|  
|        <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR PIP<RET>
|        PIP>@BLDFE2<RET>
|  
|  BLDFE2, like the BLDFE1 file used in Part 1,  tells  PIP  which  files
|  belong on this volume.  It will also do a directory of the volume when
|  it is finished copying those files.  The process will  take  about  20
|  minutes for DECtapes and 5 minutes for floppies.
|  
|    6.  Once the file copy is complete, exit from PIP and  dismount  the
|        volume:
|  
|        For DECtapes:                        For Floppies:
|  
|        PIP><CTRL/Z>                         PIP><CTRL/Z>
|        <CTRL/\>                             <CTRL/\>
|        PAR>MCR DMO<RET>                     PAR>MCR DMO<RET>
|        DMO>DT0:<RET>                        DMO>DX0:<RET>
|        DMO -- DISMOUNT COMPLETE             DMO -- DISMOUNT COMPLETE
|        DMO><CTRL/Z>                         DMO><CTRL/Z>
|  
|    7.  Remove the DECtape or floppy from the drive.  Label it as volume
|        "C" of the set.
|  
|  The installation process is complete.


                                    D-5











                                 APPENDIX E

                    SOFTWARE INSTALLATION GUIDE GLOSSARY



   This appendix lists and explains the terms  and  conventions  used  in
   this manual.


   AC

        An accumulator.


   Accounting Files

        The files that are used to control access  and  use  of  computer
        resources.   ACTDAE.SYS  and  QUOTA.SYS are the accounting files.
        See Chapter 9 for more information about these files.


   AUTCON

        The monitor module  to  automatically  configure  tape  and  disk
        drives.   AUTCON  is part of the monitor, that detects changes in
        status of I/O channels.  It is also invoked at system startup  to
        build the appropriate data bases for mass-bus and CI bus devices.


   BAF block

        The BAT block that is stored in memory.


   BAT block

        The data table, stored on disk, containing information about  bad
        areas on disk.


   CRASH.EXE



                                    E-1
        The file automatically written by BOOT  when  the  system  fails.
        CRASH.EXE can be used to reload a suspended monitor.


   CTY:

        The console terminal for the front  end  and  CPU.   The  CTY  is
        usually a hard-copy terminal, so that important information about
        the system that is printed can be easily perused when the  system
        is not running.


   CUSP

        A Commonly Used  System  Program  that  works  closely  with  the
        monitor  to  perform  system functions.  For example, LOGIN, PIP,
        and BACKUP are CUSPs.


   DAY-MON-YEAR

        The format of the system date you supply to the ONCE-only dialog.


   Ersatz Device Names

        The monitor associates certain device names with  PPNs.   Such  a
        device  name  is  called  an  "ersatz device." The list of ersatz
        device names can be expanded  with  Question  49  of  the  HDWGEN
        portion of MONGEN.


   File Structure

        A file structure is one or more disk packs, mounted and spinning,
        that  have  been  defined to the monitor as a single entity to be
        referenced  and  accessed  by  the  file  structure  name.   File
        structure information is entered into the disk HOME blocks by the
        ONCE program.


   HH:MM:SS

        The time you input for the system time in the ONCE-only dialog.


   HIGH-ADDR

        The high-bound physical address in memory that is  referenced  in
        the ONCE dialog.


   HOME block

        The data block that is stored on disk which contains  information


                                    E-2
        about  the  unit's file structure, access information, and amount
        of swapping space.


   Initial Job Search List

        The job's initial search list  (established  by  LOGIN  from  the
        information in the accounting files.)


   Job Search List

        Those file structures that constitute DSK for the job.


   LOW-ADDR

        The lower-bound address of a physical address reference specified
        in the ONCE dialog.


   MFD

        The Master File Directory of all the User File  Directories.   An
        MFD is kept for each file structure.


   ONCE

        The monitor module that contains the ONCE-only  mandatory  system
        startup dialog and I/O device initialization.  In debugging mode,
        ONCE preserves the monitor's symbol table.  If the  data  is  not
        available, ONCE asks why the system is being reloaded, and allows
        any of several startup options to change disk  parameters  and/or
        start up the system.


   ONCMOD

        The monitor  module  containing  the  optional  ONCE-only  system
        startup  dialog  for  disk  initialization.   Structure  and unit
        parameters are changed using ONCMOD.  TWICE  runs  ONCMOD  during
        timesharing.


   OPR device

        A  designation  made  for  the  benefit  of  the  monitor,  which
        indicates  the terminal from which the operator's controlling job
        is running.  Monitor messages for the operator  are  directed  to
        the OPR device.


   OPR program



                                    E-3
        The operator-interface program to the various components  of  the
        GALAXY batch and spooling system.


   PPN

        A project-programmer number.  [PPN] in square brackets represents
        the User File Directory of the user with that PPN.


   REFSTR

        The monitor module that is called by ONCE and  TWICE  to  refresh
        structures.


   SAB block

        The SAT block that is stored in memory.


   SAT block

        The  Storage  Allocation  Table,  stored  on  each   disk   unit,
        containing  information  about  the status of the clusters on the
        disk and their use bits, which tell whether clusters on the  disk
        are "in use," storing data, or "free" for storage of data.


   STR-NAME

        The name of a defined file structure, which you  provide  to  the
        ONCE dialog.


   SYSINI

        The monitor module responsible for system initialization.  SYSINI
        runs  only  in  the  policy,  or  boot, CPU.  It invokes the ONCE
        dialog, initializes device data blocks, maps memory, and sets  up
        monitor  service  routines,  such  as  the RSX-20F interface.  In
        time, it causes CPU startup.


   System Dump List

        The list of file structures that will be searched  for  space  to
        store CRASH.EXE when the system fails.


   System Search List

        Those files structures that are searched when some ersatz  device
        names, such as SYS:  or DEC:, are used.



                                    E-4
   UFD

        The User File Directory that lists the files of each  user  in  a
        file structure.


   UNIT-NAME

        The physical unit name of a disk specified in the ONCE dialog.
















































                                    E-5
                                   INDEX



   Account string definition, 11-10      switches, 9-14
   Account validation                  FEFILE, 5-2
     enabling, 9-7                     FGEN, 9-14
     setting up, 11-10                 File structures
   Assembling                            defining, A-16
     monitor sources, B-1                modifying, A-11
     the monitor, 9-16                   refreshing, A-25
                                       File system
   Beware files, 5-7                     front end, 6-1
   Boot file specification               KS microprocessor, 6-6
     for KL, 3-3                         TOPS-10, 5-5
     for KS, 3-5                       FRCLIN mechanism, 12-2
   BOOT program, 6-6                   Front end
   Bootable tape, 9-19                   file system, 6-1
   Booting                               installation material, 2-3
     from DECtape, 3-1
     from floppies, 3-1                GALAXY spoolers, 10-2
     KL front end, 3-2                 GALAXY system
                                         assembling, 10-11
   Changing                              components, 10-1
     disk parameters, A-13               starting, 10-14
   Configuring                           stopping, 10-12
     the monitor, 9-1                    tailoring, 10-3
   CPU serial number, 9-6              GALGEN, 10-3
   CREDIR program, 5-5                 GO startup option, A-24
    
   Decimal symbols, B-2, B-5, B-7      INITIA monitor command, 12-10
   Default                             INITIA program
     disk parameters, A-20               disabling, A-25
   Defining                              system startup, 12-1
     disk units, A-13                  Installation
     file structures, A-16               materials, 2-1
     structure owner, A-18               tapes, 2-2
     swapping lists, A-11
     system dump list, A-12            KS microprocessor file system,
     system search list, A-13              6-6
   DESTROY Startup Option, A-20
   DESTROY startup option, 4-3         Loading
   Device names, 5-5                     the monitor, 9-17
   Disk parameters                       unbundled software, 9-17
     changing, A-13                    Login failures, 11-12
     defaults, A-20
   Disk units, A-13                    Minimum hardware configuration,
                                           2-3
   Enabling account verification,      Modifying file structures, A-11
       9-7                             MONGEN
   Ersatz device names, 5-5              program, 9-1
                                         questions, 9-4
   FAILUR.LOG file, 11-12              Monitor configuration, 9-1
   Feature-test                        Monitor-build files, 9-1
     configuration file, 9-1           Multi-CPU system front ends, 6-1


                                  Index-1
   Octal symbols, B-4, B-6, B-7        Specifying monitor configuration,
   ONCE dialog, A-1                        9-1
   ONCE program, 4-1                   Standard directories, 5-5
     startup options, A-7              Starting the monitor, 9-18
   OPR.ATO file, 12-10                 Startup option
   OPSER auto file, 12-10                DESTROY, 4-3
                                         GO, A-24
   Powering up the KL10, 2-5             REFRESH, A-25
   Powering up the KS10, 2-5           Structure owner, A-18
   Printing Beware files, 5-7          Swapping list, A-11
   PROJCT.ACT file, 11-10              SYSCNF configuration file, 9-1
   PROJCT.EXE file, 11-11              SYSGEN, 9-6
                                       SYSJOB.INI
                                         commands, 12-3
   REACT program                         creating, 12-3
     getting help, 11-2                  example, 12-3
     privileges required to run,         file, 12-1
         11-1                          System dump list, A-12
     profile attributes, 11-4          System name, 9-6
     user profile, 11-4                System search list, A-13
   REFRESH startup option, A-25
   Refreshing file structures, A-25    Terminal lines
   Reloading KS systems, 6-7, 8-9        number, 12-7
   Restoring                             option, 12-8
     FEFILE, 5-2                       Terminal names, 12-7
                                       TOPS-10 file system, 5-5
                                       TTY.INI
   Saving the monitor, 9-19              creating, 12-5
   SCDMAP.SYS file, C-6                  file, 12-2, 12-5
   SCDSET program, C-1
   Setting date and time, 4-2          USAGE accounting, 11-10
   SIXBIT symbols, B-5, B-8            User runtime, 9-6

























                                  Index-2